JP2016087447A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of making complex a performance of a rotor.SOLUTION: A game machine includes switching means for permitting transmission of drive force to a first transmission path FL1 and breaking drive force to a second transmission path FL2 when a drive motor 350 is rotated clockwise, and for breaking transmission of drive force to the second transmission path FL2 and permitting transmission of drive force to the first transmission path FL1 when drive means is rotated counterclockwise, thus transmitting drive force to a first rotor 340a and a second rotor 340b through the two transmission paths by one drive motor 350.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 59

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a first rotating body and a second rotating body with a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated to There is known a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize a graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface and a graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of a second rotating body (Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-220215 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that driving means are required for each rotating body, and the cost increases accordingly.

  Therefore, in addition to the above-described gaming machine, the applicant of the present application is a gaming machine provided with transmission means for transmitting the driving force of one driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the respective rotating states are different. Developed (not known at the time of filing this application). However, in this case, the production by the first rotating body and the second rotating body is limited to two modes in which one driving means rotates forward and backward, and the two modes reverse the time series in the rotation. Therefore, there is a problem that the change in performance by the first rotating body and the second rotating body is scarce and the production is simplified.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of complicating the effects of the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is driven by a driving means, a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, a driving force transmitted from the transmission means, and on the outer peripheral surface. In a gaming machine comprising at least a first rotating body and a second rotating body on which a plurality of figures are drawn, and allowing a player to visually recognize the figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the transmission means includes: Positive direction transmitting means for transmitting rotation of the driving means in the positive direction to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the rotating state of the rotating body and the rotating state of the second rotating body are different; and the driving means A reverse direction transmission means for transmitting the rotation in the reverse direction opposite to the normal direction to the predetermined member, and when the drive means is rotated in the positive direction, the rotation of the drive means to the positive direction transmission means To the reverse transmission means while allowing transmission Switching means for interrupting transmission and, when the driving means is rotated in the reverse direction, interrupting transmission of rotation of the driving means to the forward direction transmitting means and permitting transmission to the reverse direction transmitting means And comprising.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined member is formed of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and the forward direction transmitting means and the backward direction transmitting means are provided. Due to the difference in structure, when the driving force is transmitted from the forward direction transmission means and when the driving force is transmitted from the reverse direction transmission means, the first rotating body and the second rotating body The rotation state is different.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein at least a part of the transmission means is from at least one axial end of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. It is formed to project inward.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the effect of the rotating body can be complicated.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the rotating state of the rotating body can be configured in a plurality of ways.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the space for arranging the rotating body can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a container. (A) is a side view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st rotary body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a front view of a center floating unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center floating unit. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a center floating unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st member. It is an exploded back perspective view of the 1st member. It is a front view of a left-right rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left-right rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left-right rotation unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central idler unit disposed at the lowered position. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the central idler unit disposed at the lowered position. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit. (A) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, (b) is a top view of the central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, and (c) is an XLIc-XLIc in FIG. 41 (b). It is a cross-sectional back view of the center floating unit and left-right rotation unit in a line. (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus in the XLIIb-XLIIb line | wire of Fig.42 (a). (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line | wire of Fig.43 (a). (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left-right sensor device taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). (A) is a front view of a left-right sensor apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus in the XLVb-XLVb line | wire of Fig.45 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the plate glass of a glass unit. (A) is a side view of the container in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the container in the arrow XLVIIb direction view of Fig.47 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. (A) is a side view of the container in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the container in the arrow LIb direction view of Fig.51 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. (A) is a top view of the central floating unit in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the central floating unit in the direction of the arrow LVb in FIG. 55 (a), and (c) is FIG. 56 is a rear view of the central floating unit in a state where the arm body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). (A) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left and right rotating unit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left and right rotating unit. (A) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of the 2nd rotating body in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a side view of the container in which the second rotating body in the arrow LIXa direction view of FIG. 58 is disposed, and (b) is a front view of the container in the arrow LXIIb direction view of FIG. 59 (a). (C) is a side view of the container body as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIc in FIG. 59 (b), and (d) is a partially enlarged side view of the second rotating body in FIG. 59 (a). (E) is a partially enlarged side view of the second rotating body in FIG. 59 (c). (A) is a timing chart which shows the output voltage of a sensor part at the time of a 2nd gear rotating in the direction which slides with respect to an engagement piece, (b) to (d) is respectively Fig.60 (a). It is a timing chart showing an example of the operation state of the drive motor in the state, (e) is a front view of the second gear and the end face plate when the drive motor is stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (b), (F) is a front view of the second gear and the end plate when the drive motor is stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (c), and (g) is the drive motor at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (d). It is a front view of the 2nd gear and end face board at the time of being stopped. It is a front exploded perspective view of the 1st rotating body in a 7th embodiment. (A) is a side view of the container viewed from the side from the engagement member side, and (b) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62 (a). (A), (c), (e), and (g) are side views of the first rotating body and the transmission gear that are visually recognized along the axial direction from the drive side end plate side, and (b) is a diagram of FIG. 63 (a) is a front view of the first rotating body and the transmission gear as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIIIb, and FIG. 63 (d) is a front view of the first rotating body and the transmission gear as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIIId in FIG. 63 (c). FIG. 63F is a front view of the first rotating body and the transmission gear in the direction of the arrow LXIIIf in FIG. 63E, and FIG. 63H is the first rotation in the direction of the arrow LXIIIh in FIG. It is a front view of a body and a transmission gear. It is a front exploded perspective view of a container and a pair of rotating bodies in an 8th embodiment. (A) is a side view of the container as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 64, and (b) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVb in FIG. (A) to (d) is a side view of the shielding device and the locking device. (A) And (b) is a side view of a shielding device and a locking device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a container in a 9th embodiment, and a pair of rotating bodies. (A) is a side view of the container in the direction of the arrow LXIXa in FIG. 68, and (b) is a rear view of the container in the direction of the arrow LXIXb in FIG. 69 (a). (A) is a partial enlarged side view of the container 9330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIXa in FIG. 68, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the container in the line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70 (a). FIG. 69 is a side view of the container in the direction of the arrow LXIXa in FIG. 68. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of the center unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a center unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a container. It is a top view of a container and a circular arc plate member. (A) is a top view of a container and an arc board member, (b) is sectional drawing of the container and an arc board member in the LXXVIb-LXXVIb line | wire of Fig.77 (a). (A) is a side view of the container in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIa in FIG. 75, and (b) is a front view of the container in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a bottom view of the upper intermediate plate, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the upper intermediate plate taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 79 (a), and (c) is an upper surface of the lower intermediate plate. It is a figure and (d) is sectional drawing of the lower side intermediate | middle board in the LXXIXd-LXXIXd line | wire of FIG.79 (c). (A) is a front perspective view of a reflecting member, and (b) is a partially exploded front perspective view of a reflecting member shown by disassembling a connecting portion of the reflecting member. (A) is the cross-sectional schematic diagram of the container, lower intermediate | middle board, reflection member, and vertical axis | shaft rotary body in the LXXXIAa-LXXXIAa line | wire of FIG.78 (b), (b) is the arrow of FIG.81 (a). It is a partial front view of the container, the lower intermediate plate, the reflecting member, and the vertical axis rotating body in the LXXXIb direction view. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the container, the lower intermediate plate, the reflecting member, and the vertical axis rotating body in the line LXXXIAa-LXXXIAa of FIG. 78 (b), and (b) is an arrow in FIG. It is a partial front view of a container, a lower intermediate plate, a reflecting member, and a vertical axis rotating body as viewed in the LXXXIIb direction. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the container, the lower intermediate plate, the reflecting member, and the vertical axis rotator along the line LXXXIa-LXXXIAa of FIG. 78 (b), and (b) is an arrow in FIG. 83 (a). It is a partial front view of a container in a LXXXIIIb direction view, a lower middle board, a reflective member, and a vertical axis rotating body. (A) And (b) is a top view of a container, (c) is a front view of a container in the arrow LXXXIVc direction view of FIG. 84 (a), (d) is FIG. It is a front view of the container in the arrow LXXXIVd direction view. (A) is a front view of the container in 11th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the container in the attitude | position which orient | assigned the side wall body of the container to the front. (A) to (d) is a top view of the container. (A)-(c) is an external view of the 1st rotary body in 12th Embodiment. (A) to (c) is an external view of a second rotating body. (A) to (c) is an external view of a pair of rotating bodies. (A) to (c) is an external view of a pair of rotating bodies. (A)-(c) is an external view of the 1st rotary body in 13th Embodiment. (A) to (c) is a side view of the container. (A) And (b) is a front view of a pair of rotary body. (A) to (c) is a side view of the container. (A) And (b) is a side view of the container and connection member in 14th Embodiment. (A) to (d) is a partial side view of the container in the fifteenth embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16 a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or flashing of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpots or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a third winning port 82, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. The peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the third winning port 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball has won the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the ball has won the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of any of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means a game state in which a ball is likely to win the third winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The time to be changed is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are in an opened state (open state), the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are closed (closed state). Compared to the case where the ball is in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, it becomes easier to win the ball. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  Note that the opening time of the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is not changed or changed during the probability change or in the short time. In addition to changing the time, it is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened per one time as compared with normal time. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the opening time and the number of times the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened per one time. In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened for the first time or per time. The number of times of opening the electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82 may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal case.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B triggered by any one of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82 (starting winning). While synchronizing, the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays the variation of the third symbol, and the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol with the passage as a trigger.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body lifting unit 300, the central idler unit 400, and the left and right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86 and opens. It can be visually recognized through the section.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed so that they are alternately lit for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  When the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. The first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Accordingly, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, the player is given many opportunities to open the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  It is to be noted that the probability of hitting is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a per hit, When the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening during the short time, the time required to display the variation of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the left area of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured such that, of the balls launched onto the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol winning lottery is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays the variation. For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of passages of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 of the sphere is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained spheres is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol. A hold lamp (not shown) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls to be retained for the passage of the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. A third winning opening 82 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second prize opening switch is turned on. Accordingly, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a big win lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the third winning port 82 is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 The number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first winning slot 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second winning slot 640 and the third winning slot 82 are as follows. Different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 and the third prize opening 82 May be configured as five.

  The first winning combination 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is unlikely to win the second winning opening 640. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640 a is The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  Further, the second winning combination 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82 a The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a are opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 during the probability change or the shorter time than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and the case where the ball is won at the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 is a high probability even in a low probability state. The situation is the same. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball hits the first prize slot 64 when the ball wins the second prize slot 640 and the third prize slot 82. It is set higher than when winning. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82a as in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the ball can always win. It is in a state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82 are often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. A ball is fired so as to pass the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the first winning port 64 without an electric accessory (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning port 64 It is advantageous for a player to obtain a lot of jackpot lottery opportunities and aim to win a jackpot.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the second through gate 67 makes it easy for the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 to be in an open state, and wins the third winning opening 82. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the third prize opening 82 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the second through gate 67 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to place the second electric accessory 82a in an open state and aim for a 15R probability variation big hit by winning the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  In addition to the above-described form, either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 may be selected by a lottery for a symbol different from the second symbol when a ball passes. By the lottery of the symbol, the second electric combination 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 or the first electric combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state. In this case, since the symbols drawn by the balls passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are different, the electric combination that the balls pass through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 and opened. Will be selected one by one.

  Thus, for example, if the second electric combination 82a is opened when a winning is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is drawn, When winning is selected for the two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened. When the ball is left-handed and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is selected and the second symbol When winning is selected for a symbol different from the symbol, a gaming state in which the first electric accessory 640a is opened can be obtained.

Therefore, if the gaming state is easy to win the lottery of the second symbol during the probability change, and the gaming state is easy to hit a symbol different from the second symbol during the short time, the second through gate 67 is hit right during the probability changing. The game state is such that the second electric combination 82a is opened by allowing the ball to pass and the ball is easy to win, and during the time, the left electric strike is passed through the first through gate 66 and the first electric combination is released to win the ball. It is possible to make it easy to play. For this reason, the game state during normal, short time, and probability change can be changed to different game states, so that the player can entertain each game state.
In addition, when the second electric combination 82a is opened when the winning is selected for the second symbol, when the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is different from the second symbol. When a symbol is selected and a winning symbol is selected for a symbol different from the second symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is released, and when the ball is left-handed and passed through the first through gate 66, the second symbol is displayed. Is selected, and when the winning pattern is selected for the second symbol, a game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is opened can be made.
In this case, regardless of whether the probability is changing or when the time is short, when the player hits right and the ball passes through the second through gate 67, the first electric combination is released, and the gaming state is such that the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640. When the ball is left-handed and the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and a gaming state in which the ball can easily enter the third winning port 82 can be achieved. Therefore, the player needs to change how to strike from right-handed to left-handed or left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game because the player can change the way to hit at any time.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the big win lottery performed due to the winning of any of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 64, and the third winning port 82 becomes a big win, a predetermined time (variation time) is obtained. After the elapse, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Occurrence is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. The variable display device unit 80 may be on the left side.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on second symbol display device are performed by MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) at power-on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 320, 350, 435, 450.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  7 shows a state in which the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 is placed in the lowered position, the central idler unit 400 is in the raised position, and the left / right rotary unit 500 is in the retracted position. In FIG. A state in which the unit 300 is disposed at the raised position, the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, and the left and right rotation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and the rotary body lifting unit 300 and the central idler are provided above and below the inner space of the back case 210. Each unit 400 is disposed, and a pair of left and right rotation units 500 and left and right sensor devices 600 are disposed on the left and right sides of the central floating unit 400.

  The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one surface side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by each of the wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 includes a plurality of (three in this embodiment) box-shaped housings 330 arranged in the width direction, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) each housed in each of the housings 330. ) Rotating bodies (first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b).

  The plurality of containers 330 are formed so as to be movable up and down independently in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are disposed on the back side of the game board 13 and are not visible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can see through the opening. Is done.

  The first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotatably supported by the housing 330, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface by the rotation are visually recognized by the player in order. Let In addition, the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are formed as a columnar body of a cross-sectional triangle, and a different figure is each drawn on three surfaces of an outer periphery.

  In the present embodiment, the drive source of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is shared by the single drive motor 350, and the component cost can be reduced, while the first rotator 340a and the second rotator are reduced. The combination of figures of 340b can be changed, and a total of nine types of combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). Details will be described later.

  The central floating unit 400 includes a base body 410, a pair of arm bodies 430 that are pivotally supported by the base body 410 so that the base end side is rotatable, and a distal end side opposite to the base end side of the pair of arm bodies 430. 1st member 440 connected so that relative displacement is possible respectively.

  The pair of arm bodies 430 are respectively driven by separate drive motors 450 and formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other. Thus, the first member 440 can be moved not only in a linear lift along the vertical direction, but also in a mode combining a linear motion and a rotational motion, and can be lifted up and down while incorporating the motion, The movement of the first member 440 can be changed (see FIGS. 31 to 34). Details will be described later.

  The left and right rotating unit 500 includes a base body (a back base 511 and a front base 512) disposed on the front surfaces of the front bases 315 and 317 of the rotating body lifting unit 300 and the base body 410 of the central floating unit 400, and the base body 410. And a displacement member 530 rotatably supported at the base end side. The displacement member 530 is retracted to the back side of the game board 13 so as to be invisible to the player (see FIG. 7), and an overhang position (see FIG. 7) projecting into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86). (See FIG. 8). In this case, the displacement member 530 is arranged at the overhanging position, so that the displacement member 530 is in contact with the first member 440 so that its movement can be restricted (see FIG. 41). Details will be described later.

  The left / right sensor device 600 includes a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit and reflected from the object F (see FIG. 46). The presence or absence of the player's fingers in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16 is formed.

  The first sensor 610 is disposed on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotary body elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210. The In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit facing inward. Accordingly, the game board 13 (center frame 86) can be disposed at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edges of the openings (positions on the outer side in the width direction) across the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86). It can be made difficult.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 46, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central idler unit 400, the left and right rotating unit 500, and the left and right sensor device 600 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22, a detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotary body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300 </ b> C for elevating and lowering the central container 330, and a left unit 300 </ b> L and a right unit 300 </ b> R for elevating the left and right containers 330, respectively. And 3 units. The left unit 300L is overlaid on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby three containers 330 are arranged in parallel in the width direction.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 19, the detailed configuration of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300 </ b> C includes an L-shaped rear base 311 in front view, a front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front side of the front base 312. The disposed drive motor 320, the housing 330 that is raised and lowered with respect to the back base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, the first rotating body 340 a and the first rotating body 340 housed in the housing 330. The two-rotary body 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between opposed surfaces of the back base 311 and the front base 312 and that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330 are mainly provided.

  The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300 </ b> C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322, A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and geared on the side surface of the flat plate member, the rack gear 324 is disposed on one side, and the housing 330 is disposed on the other side. And a connecting member 325 provided.

  A pair of shafts project from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported by these shafts. In addition, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 so that the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the connecting member 325 (rack gear 324) is arranged by these slide guides 351 and 352. ) And the container 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. As the rack gear 324 moves linearly, the housing 330 is displaced (moved up and down) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically long portion where the rack gear 324 is disposed and the vertically long portion where the container 330 is disposed with the horizontally long portion between the lower ends thereof. Thus, it is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front. Accordingly, even when the central container 330 is disposed at the raised position with the left container 330 disposed at the lowered position, the horizontally long portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  The slide guide 351 is a linear guide comprising a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back base 311 and a slide body formed so as to be slidable along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R described later. The slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail and the second rail, the first rail fixed to the back surface base 311, the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the housing 330, and both of them. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism comprising an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

  Here, since the left container 330 is arranged in parallel to the side of the central container 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the lateral width of the connecting member 325 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 12). ) Longer dimensions. Furthermore, as described above, in order to avoid visual recognition from the player, a horizontally long portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central container 330 is likely to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is disposed on the back side of the central container 330, so that the central container 330 is disposed at the raised position. However, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the central container 330 by restricting the shaking in the left-right direction by the extended slide guide 352. On the other hand, in a state where the central container 330 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300 </ b> L includes a rear base 313 that is formed in a vertically long front view and is disposed in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300 </ b> C. The intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, the front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, the drive motor 320 disposed on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 Is accommodated between the opposing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330. And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 fixed coaxially to the transmission gear 322b. And a rack gear 324 that is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and formed as a rack that is geared on the side surface of a flat plate member, and a connecting member 326 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on the shaft. Further, the intermediate base 314 is provided with a shaft support hole, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole so as to be rotatable.

  A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 313 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. . A guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. The guide plate 353 is provided with a guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-like opening, extending in the vertical direction. In this guide groove 353a, a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is interposed via a collar C. Interpolated. Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 becomes the linear motion of the rack gear 324. As a result of the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is displaced (lifted / lowered) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L includes a rear base 316 that is formed in a substantially L-shape on the front and is connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. A front base 317 superimposed on the front side of the back base 313, a drive motor 320 disposed on the front side of the front base 317, and the back and forth base 316 and the front base 317 are raised and lowered by the driving force of the drive motor 320. Housing 330, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 housed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 316 and the front base 317. A transmission mechanism for transmitting to the body 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a plate-like member meshed with the pinion gear 323. A rack gear 324 is formed as a rack whose side surfaces are chopped, and a connecting member 327 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 324 is rotatably supported on the shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 316 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. . The front base 316 is provided with a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, extending in the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is colored in the guide groove 316a (see FIG. (Not shown). Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316 a of the back surface base 316. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into a linear motion of the rack gear 324, and Accompanying the linear motion, the container 330 is displaced (lifted) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 tends to become unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, the rack gears 323 are provided at positions close to the side surfaces of the left housing 330 and the right housing 330, so that the lateral widths of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. 14 and 16). The horizontal dimension) can be shortened to increase its rigidity. Therefore, the posture of the left and right containers 330 can be stabilized (left and right direction and difficult to shake).

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide an extendable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right containers 330, and guidance by the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the guide plate 353 or the back base 316 is provided. Can sufficiently stabilize the posture. As a result, the part cost can be reduced.

  Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 330. 18A is a side view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. It is. 18A and 18B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 is disposed on the inner surface side of the base body 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 disposed on the left and right sides of the base body 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition body 334 and the decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base body 331 are formed, and these portions 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

  The base 331 is a member that forms the back surface (FIG. 18B, the back side of the paper), the top surface, and the bottom surface (the upper side and the lower side of FIG. 18B) of the housing 330, and is a combination of three plate-like members. Are integrally formed. A reflective portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front surface of a portion forming the back surface of the container 330.

  The reflection part RF is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, and has a size that protrudes at least in the vertical direction from both of the rotary bodies 340a and 340b when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18B).

  The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-like members that form the left and right side surfaces of the container 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are formed at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 (described later) of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 in a non-rotatable manner. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a shape in which the axial cross-sectional shape of the inner peripheral surface thereof is a shape obtained by removing one of the circles by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line.

  The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-like member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between surfaces facing the side wall body 332. The partition wall 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334a through which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are inserted.

  The decorative body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the container 330, and is formed in a front-view frame shape by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

  The container 330 formed in this manner includes a drive motor 350 disposed on the partition wall 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b that are rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 320, and a drive. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 320 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and a detection mechanism that detects the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a are mainly housed.

  The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 includes a drive gear 351 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352 that is meshed with the drive gear 351, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355. The gear train which consists of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably supported between the opposing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are the first rotation body 340a and the second rotation body 340b. Each is fixed to the axial end face.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the detailed structure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b is demonstrated. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

  In addition, since the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are substantially the same structures except the point from which the figure drawn on an outer peripheral surface differs, below, the 1st rotary body 340a is a typical example. The description of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 that are rotatably supported at both axial ends (shaft portions 341b) of the fixed shaft 341, and the pair of end face plates 342a. Three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) provided between the end face plates 342 are mainly provided.

  The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341a and shaft portions 341b provided continuously at both axial ends of the body portion 341a. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the housing 330, and connects the pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and the pair of shaft portions 341a. And a body portion 341b.

  The shaft portion 341b has a shape obtained by removing one of the circular straight cross-sectional shapes of the circular shape by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape obtained by chamfering a part of the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder with a plane). The shape is slightly similar to the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side walls 332 and 333. Therefore, the shaft 341b is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side walls 332 and 333, so that the fixed shaft 341 can be held in the container 330 (side walls 332 and 333) in a non-rotatable manner.

  A plurality (four in this embodiment) of LEDs 344 are attached to the body 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be irradiated to the inner surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C.

  In this case, in the state where the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and held unrotatable, the trunk portion 341b changes the irradiation direction of the LED 344 to the front surface of the housing 330 (decorative body 335 Are disposed in a posture (rotational position) toward the opening 335a of FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display plate disposed on the front surface (a “visual position” described later) of the container 330 among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. it can.

  The fixed shaft 341 (the shaft portion 341a and the body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape having both ends opened in the axial direction. Therefore, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed using such an internal space, and the wiring is pivoted. It can be pulled out of the container 330 through the opening at the end in the direction. In addition, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 cannot be rotated with respect to the housing 330, so that even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force such as twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

  The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342 having a circular axial cross section is formed in the center. The inner diameter dimension of the shaft support hole 342 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the shaft portion 341 a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, the end face plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341 by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a. Thereby, the end surface plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

  Here, the fixed shaft 341 has a body 341b having a larger diameter than the shaft 341a. Therefore, the end plate 342 is disposed between the side walls 332 and 333 of the housing 330 and the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

  A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 to be described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. Note that the second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342 to the second rotating body 340b, but mounting of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

  Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and by connecting the outer edges at both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342, respectively. It spans between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular prism with the end face plates 342.

  Each of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C has a figure drawn on the outer surface thereof. Therefore, when the triangular prismatic body is rotated, the figures respectively drawn on the outer surfaces of the display boards 343A to 343C are made visible to the player in order through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

  At least a part of the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed to be curved in an arc shape protruding outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as described later, each display board 343A can be used even when there is a shift of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) of the rotational position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the graphic drawn on the outer surface of ˜343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

  In the present embodiment, when the fixed shaft 341 is viewed in the axial direction, the end portions in the width direction of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are curved in an arc shape protruding outward, A central portion in the width direction is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both of ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. Further, the radius of the arc of the arc-shaped portion formed by bending is larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times). Is set to:

  Here, in the following, as the arrangement positions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular prism-shaped body is rotated, the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the front side in FIG. 18B). The position at which the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a “viewing position”, and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). A position at which a graphic drawn on the outer surface becomes invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a “shielding position”.

  Therefore, for example, when the first display panel 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). . When the triangular prism is rotated in the forward or reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C is disposed at the viewing position, and the second display board 343B or the third display is displayed. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are disposed at the shielding position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are transmissive portions PN capable of transmitting light. Is formed in part. In addition, a reflective portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A.

  As described above, the LED 344 is disposed at a position where the inner surface of the display panel disposed at the visual recognition position among the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in the state where the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is directly visible to the player through the transmission part PN of each of the display boards 343B and 343C. Can be made.

  On the other hand, in the state where the first display plate 343A is disposed at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected on the reflection portion RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. And reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base body 331 of the container 330, and reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the base body 331 is reflected by the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C. Can be visually recognized by the player.

  For example, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotation position where the first display panel 343A is arranged at the viewing position, and the LED 344 emits light, so that the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF in the base body 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. The figure of the 2nd display board 343B or the 3rd display board 343C arrange | positioned at the position (shielding position) which cannot be visually recognized from the player can be made to associate. Thereby, a player can be expected or suggested that the 1st rotary body 340a rotates to the position where the figure of the 2nd display board 343B or the 3rd display board 343C becomes visible.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section. Therefore, when each of the rotators 340a and 340b is rotated, the reflecting plate is accompanied with the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (display panels 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of each rotating body 340a, 340b (FIG. 18 (b) vertical distance), or The apparent diameter (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18 (b)) of each rotator 340a, 340b can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface (each display plate 343A to 343C) of each rotator 340a, 340b is opposed to the reflector RF. The angle can be changed. That is, with the rotation of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b, the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transmission part PN is reflected on the player who visually recognizes the reflected light from the reflection part RF of the base body 441. The mode (for example, the size of the region where light is visually recognized) can be periodically changed.

  Returning to FIG. 17 and FIG. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362 and having a diameter. A terminal gear 363 including a detection plate 363a that projects outward in the direction is provided, and a sensor device 364 that detects the detection plate 363a of the terminal gear 363.

  The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is disposed on the base body 331 in a state where a detection region is disposed on the movement locus of the detection plate 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detected object of the detected plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

  Next, the rotation operation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b through the transmission mechanism, and both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

  Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. Thereby, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. When the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. Thereby, the 2nd rotary body 340b rotates in the same direction as the 1st rotary body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction to the case described above.

  As a result, the combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b visually recognized by the player is sequentially changed. In this case, the number of combinations of the figures of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is limited to three in the conventional product.

  That is, since the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotationally driven in synchronization by one drive motor, the possible combinations are, for example, the first display board 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A. A first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the two-rotary body 340a is arranged at the display position, and the second display plate 343B of the first rotary body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotary body 340a are at the display position. There were only three combinations of the second combination to be arranged, the third combination of the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340a arranged at the display position.

  On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are independently rotated by different drive motors, up to nine combinations can be formed, and the combinations Can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the cost of parts is increased by the amount of two drive motors required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed while suppressing the number of drive motors 350 to one, and the combinations are Can appear arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, nine sets of combinations can be quickly displayed by not requiring a perfect match between the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotating positions. Can be issued. A combination of the figures of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. FIG. 21 (e) to FIG. 1 to 5, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) are shown in FIG. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 10, respectively.

  In FIG. 20, as a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display board 343A is arranged at the viewing position is indicated by the sign “A” or “A ′”. The state in which the second display board 343B is disposed on the display position is indicated by a symbol “B” or “B ′”, and the state in which the third display board 343C is disposed at the viewing position is indicated by a reference symbol “C” or “C ′”. Is done.

  For example, in FIG. 10 "A, C '" indicates that the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotator 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions, respectively. The figure drawn on the first display board 343A from 340a and the figure drawn on the third display board 343C from the second rotating body 340b correspond to the state visually recognized by the player.

  In FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343 </ b> A to the third display plate 343 </ b> C of the first rotating body 340 a are denoted by reference numerals “A to C”, and the second display plate 343 </ b> A is used. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotator 340a are respectively illustrated using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are set to different values for the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 that are fixed to each other. In this embodiment, when the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees. To be formed.

  No. in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21A, the first display board 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display board 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the viewing positions (No. in FIG. 20). 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, No. 1 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21B, the second rotating body 340b places the second display panel 343B at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “B ′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  In this case, since the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a, a difference (shift) of 12 degrees occurs between the rotational positions of the two rotating bodies 340a. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees, and as a result, the second display boards of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It can be recognized that the graphics drawn on the outer surface of 343B are arranged at the visual recognition positions (the second combination is formed).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (I.e., the surface on which the graphic is drawn is curved along the rotational direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b), so that a player who views the graphic drawn on the outer surface of each of the display boards 343A to 343C in front view It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  No. in FIG. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 21B, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, No. 2 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 21 (c), the second rotating body 340b is disposed at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotational angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player recognizes a graphic shift (combination failure, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

  Similarly, in FIG. 4 and the state shown in FIG. 9 and the rotation of the section up to the state shown in FIG. 22 (d), the first rotating body 340a arranges the display plates 343A to 343C at the visual recognition position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while the second rotating body The rotation position 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotation body 340a. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to recognize a graphic shift (no combination is established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

  No. in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed at the viewing position. No. 20 No. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 22 (e), the second rotating body 340b places the third display panel 343C at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  Note that, according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is also performed in the section in which the figure shift (combination failure, No. 3 “−, C” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figure visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure is combined in the third combination.

  Thereafter, substantially the same as the above-described mode (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 21A of FIG. 20 to the state shown in No. 9 and FIG. 22E of FIG. 20). By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, no. 11-No. 20 may be replaced with a state in which the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 is different by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A ′, B "), the fifth combination (No. 12" B ', C "in Fig. 20) and the sixth combination (No. 20" C', B "in Fig. 20).

  In addition, in FIG. 21-No. 30 may be replaced with a state in which the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 is changed by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A ′, FIG. C ”), the eighth combination (No. 22“ B ′, A ”in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30“ C ′, C ”in FIG. 20).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b includes a plurality of gears (drive gear 351 to second gear 355). The rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b at different rotation ratios.

  Thereby, the rotation period of the 1st rotary body 340a and the rotation period of the 2nd rotary body 340b can be varied. As a result, even if only one drive motor 350 is used, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired Any combination can appear).

  In addition, since the transmission mechanism is formed as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified, the cost of parts can be reduced and the durability and reliability can be improved, but the gears are always meshed. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse.

  Therefore, for example, the table in FIG. 20 proceeds in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), and sections (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) in which a graphic shift (combination of combinations) is formed. Then, after the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) appears or just before it appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed and the table of FIG. 20 is reversed. A series of operations of returning to the direction (upward direction in FIG. 20) can be repeated, thereby producing an effect of causing the player to expect the appearance of the third combination.

  Alternatively, for example, the ninth combination (No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20) appears from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 20) is formed. 20 is advanced in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination appears in addition to the table in FIG. 20 in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20). To the 9th combination. That is, in the former case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a needs to be repeated 30 times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is performed once. Therefore, a desired combination of figures can be quickly displayed.

  Here, when the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). On the other hand, in the case of setting to “1 / integer” times), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can do. However, in this case, the maximum number of figures that can be combined is three.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 “A ′, A”, No. 11 “A ′, B” and No. 11 in FIG. 21 “A ′, C”), and the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body A difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur at the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be set to nine.

  That is, in the structure in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated by one drive motor 350, the number of figures that can be combined is nine. This means that the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotator 340a. And the transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotator 340b cannot be achieved simply by forming it as a gear train, and as in the present embodiment, it is at the rotational position of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. This is possible for the first time by allowing the difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle to occur. Thereby, while aiming at the improvement of the presentation effect by the increase in the number of figures which can be combined, the required number of the drive motor 350 can be suppressed and the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, combinations of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) that cause a difference (shift) in a predetermined rotation angle at the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In the combination), the stop position at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

  For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 “B ′, B”, No. 12 “B ′, C” and No. 22 “B ′, A” in FIG. 20), FIG. As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotator 340b is delayed, the first rotator 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotator 340b, the first rotator 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, the rotation is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b so as to be inconspicuous.

  Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C ′, A”, No. 20 “C ′, B” and No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20), As shown in FIG. 22E, since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is preceded, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotator 340b, the first rotator 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, it is stopped at the rotation position rotated 114 degrees. As a result, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b so as to be inconspicuous.

  As described above, the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 is formed such that each of the storage bodies 300 can be moved up and down, and in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are moved to the game board 13. It can be made invisible to the player by being positioned on the back of the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b can be quickly displayed at a necessary timing.

  That is, in this embodiment, since nine combinations of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b comparatively much, and time increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, by disposing each container 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to positions that cannot be seen from the player. Can do. Accordingly, the rotation position of the first rotation body 340a and the second rotation body 340b can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotation position without being recognized by the player, as a result. When the timing arrives, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed, so that the desired combination can be quickly achieved. Can appear.

  In addition, you may make it arrange | position to the descending position of each container 300 only when rotating the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b with a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not disposed at the lowered position, While the rotation of the rotators 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of rotation of each of the rotators 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotary bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at positions that are not visible to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the advance rotation at the lowered position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is performed when a predetermined operation means is operated. Thereby, it can suppress that the player recognizes the advance rotation of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b.

  That is, when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even if the rotator is moved to the lowered position and cannot be seen by the player, There is a possibility that the player may recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in advance by the generated sound.

  On the other hand, when the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is performed during the operation of the predetermined operating means, the operation can be mixed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  In addition, as an operation | movement means, the payout apparatus 133, the audio | voice output apparatus 226, or the ball | bowl launching unit 112a (all refer FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) is illustrated, for example. In a state in which these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated with the ball payout, the sound output, or the ball launch. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Instead of or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. You may make it perform prior rotation. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, and accordingly, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the advance rotation of the body 340b.

  Next, the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a front view of the central floating unit 400. FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the central floating unit 400 is disposed on the base body 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 210 and on the front surface of the base body 410. A pair of cover bodies 420, a pair of arm bodies 430 that are rotatably supported between the opposing surfaces of the cover body 420 and the base body 410, and arranged in a posture facing the distal end side, and these It mainly includes a first member 440 to which the distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 430 are coupled so as to be relatively displaceable, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the pair of drive motors 450 to the pair of arm bodies 420, respectively.

  The base body 410 is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and cover bodies 420 are partially disposed (covered) at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base body 410. On the opposing surfaces of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, shaft support holes 411 and 421 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotary shaft 431) of the arm body 430 are respectively recessed at the positions where they are coaxial. Established.

  In addition, a shaft 412 for rotatably supporting a crank gear 453 (to be described later) of the transmission mechanism is projected from the front surface of the base body 410. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the shaft 412, and the retaining ring fitted into the fitting groove restricts the crank gear 453 from coming off the shaft 412. .

  A cutout 422 is formed in the side wall of the cover body 420 so that a space for allowing the arm body 430 to rotate is secured. On the other hand, when the rotation of the arm body 430 exceeds a predetermined angle, the rotation of the arm member 420 at a predetermined angle or more can be regulated by bringing the inner edge of the opening of the notch 422 into contact with the outer surface of the arm body 430. Formed. That is, the cover body 420 is formed so as to be able to exhibit a function as a stopper that restricts the rotation of the arm member 420 by a predetermined angle or more.

  A rotating body 413 is disposed in the center of the base body 410 in the longitudinal direction. The rotating body 413 is a member formed so as to be rotatable by a driving force of a driving motor (not shown). When the first member 440 is disposed at the raised position (see FIG. 31A), the first member 440 When the first member 440 is placed in the lowered position while being shielded and not visible to the player (FIG. 31 (c)), the game is placed vertically above the first member 440. It is possible to see from the person.

  The arm body 430 is a long rod-like body that is formed by bending in a generally letter shape when viewed from the front, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 431, a driven groove 432, and a connecting pin 433. As described above, the rotation shaft 431 is a shaft that is pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 411 and 421 of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and protrudes coaxially from the front surface and the back surface of the base body side of the arm body 430. Is done. The arm body 430 is rotatable with respect to the base body 410 and the cover body 420 in such a manner that the tip end side is moved up and down around the rotation shaft 431 as a rotation center.

  The driven groove 432 is a portion through which an eccentric pin 454 (to be described later) of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted. The driven groove 432 extends linearly from the bent portion of the arm body 430 toward the rotating shaft 431 (long hole in front view). Shape). As will be described later, as the crank gear 453 rotates, the eccentric pin 454 slides along the driven groove 432, so that the arm body 430 is rotated about the rotation shaft 431.

  The connection pin 433 is a rod-like body protruding from the front surface on the distal end side of the arm body 430 and is slidably inserted along a slide groove 441 a formed on the back surface of the first member 440. Via the connecting pin 433, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected so as to be relatively movable.

  Note that a collar (not shown) is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 433 inserted through the sliding groove 441a of the first member 440 in the assembly process of the first member 430, as will be described later. Is used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming out of the sliding groove 441a. In addition, the arm body 430 is provided with a rotating body 434 in front of a position opposite to the driven groove 432 across the bent portion. The rotating body 434 is formed to be rotatable by a driving force of a driving motor 435 disposed on the back side of the arm body 430.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 450 to the arm body 420, and is fixed to the mounting plate 451 to which the drive motor 450 is attached and the drive shaft of the drive motor 450. It mainly includes a pinion gear 452, a crank gear 453 meshed with the pinion gear 452, and an eccentric pin 454 positioned eccentric from the rotation center (shaft 412) of the crank gear 453.

  The mounting plate 451 is disposed in front of the base body 410 and above the cover body 420, and the pinion gear 452 is accommodated between the opposing surfaces of the mounting plate 451 and the base body 410. The eccentric pin 454 protrudes from the front of the crank gear 453 and is inserted into the driven groove 432 of the arm body 430. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the eccentric pin 454, and the eccentric pin 454 is moved from the driven groove 432 by a retaining ring fitted into the fitting groove. Regulate exiting.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 450 is transmitted to the crank gear 453 via the pinion gear 452, and when the crank gear 453 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in the present embodiment) An eccentric pin 454 that is eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced in the vertical direction in a front view while drawing an arcuate locus. As a result, the arm body 430 is pushed up or pushed down by the eccentric pin 454 that slides in the driven groove 432, and is rotated about the rotation shaft 431 (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, the first member 440 is a member that is connected to the arm body 430 so as to be relatively displaceable via the connecting pin 433 inserted through the sliding groove 441a, and the pair of arm bodies 430 are independent of each other. By being rotated, as described later, it is allowed to move freely in a combination of linear motion and rotational motion (see FIGS. 33 and 34). Here, a detailed configuration of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

  FIG. 26 is an exploded front perspective view of the first member 440, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first member 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the first member 440 is rotatable on the base 441, the front body 442 and the back body 443 disposed on the front and back surfaces of the base 441, and the back of the base 441, respectively. The disposed arm member 444, a drive motor 445 that generates a drive force for rotating the arm member 444, and a crank member 446 that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 445 to the arm member 444 are mainly used. Prepare.

  The base body 441 is a member that forms a skeleton of the first member 440, and is formed in a circular plate shape in front view. A pair of sliding grooves 441 a are formed in the base body 441. Each sliding groove 441a is formed as an opening in the shape of a long hole in a front view extending in a straight line, and a pair is arranged non-parallel. Specifically, the pair of sliding grooves 441 a are arranged in a reverse C shape in front view that is inclined upward from the center toward both ends in the front view of the base body 441.

  A cylindrical tube portion 441b formed corresponding to the inner edge of the sliding groove 441a is erected on the back surface of the base body 441, and a shaft 441c for rotatably supporting the arm member 444 is provided to protrude. Is done.

  A connecting pin 433 (see FIGS. 24 and 25) of the arm body 430 is slidably inserted into the cylindrical portion 441b. That is, since the connection pin 433 can be supported by the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 441b, the support area of the connection pin 433 can be expanded correspondingly, and the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be stabilized. .

  The front body 442 is a member that forms the front surface of the first member 440, and is formed in a disk shape that has a circular shape in front view and has a predetermined thickness dimension that is substantially the same diameter as the base body 441. The front body 442 is formed of a light transmissive material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs in the present embodiment) are disposed inside the front body 442. Therefore, the light which permeate | transmitted the front and outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be irradiated toward the exterior from a front and an outer peripheral surface by light-emitting (lighting or blinking) a some light emission means. Thereby, a player can be made to visually recognize so that the whole (front surface and outer peripheral surface) of the front body 442 may emit light.

  The front body 442 is disposed (fastened and fixed) on the base body 441 after the connection pin 433 of the arm body 430 is connected to the base body 441. That is, the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the base body 441 from the back side, and at least the tip of the connecting pin 433 protruding to the front side of the base body 441 is at least of the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441. A collar (not shown) having a diameter larger than the groove width is mounted (fastened and fixed), and this collar is used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming off the base 441.

  The arm member 444 is a long member that is longer than the diameter of the front body 442, and includes a shaft support hole 444a and a driven groove 444b. The shaft support hole 444 a is a hole that is supported by the shaft 441 a of the front body 441 and is formed at a position that is the center in the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444. The driven groove 444b is a portion through which the eccentric pin 446b of the crank member 446 is slidably inserted, and is a straight line extending perpendicularly to the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444 below the pivot support hole 444a ( It is formed as an opening having a long hole shape when viewed from the front.

  The arm member 444 is pivotally supported on a shaft 441a between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back surface body 443 in a posture in which both end portions project outward from both sides of the front body 442 (see FIG. 23). As described above, the eccentric pin 446b is slid along the driven groove 444b in accordance with the rotation of the crank member 446, and thus is rotated about the shaft support hole 444b.

  The crank member 446 is a member disposed between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back body 443, and includes a rotary body 446 a fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 445, and a rotation center (drive motor 445) of the rotary body 446 a. And an eccentric pin 446b positioned eccentric from the drive shaft). The eccentric pin 446 b protrudes from the front surface of the rotating body 446 a and is inserted into the driven groove 444 b of the arm member 444.

  When the rotary body 446a of the crank member 446 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 445, the eccentric pin 446b eccentric from the rotation center of the rotary body 446a is displaced while drawing a circular locus with a predetermined radius. Thus, the driven groove 444b is alternately pushed and pulled left and right by the eccentric pin 446b, and the shaft support hole 444a is alternately rotated in the forward and reverse directions at a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 30 degrees in the present embodiment). The arm member 444 is rotated about the (axis 441c) as a rotation center (see FIGS. 39 and 40).

  Thereby, as will be described later, the player can visually recognize the operation of the arm member 444 in such a manner that both end portions of the arm member 444 projecting from the both sides of the front body 442 are reciprocated up and down alternately. . Further, by performing the reciprocating motion of the arm member 440 while the arm body 430 is stopped, the reaction (inertial force) of the reciprocating motion is applied to the base body 441 and the front body 442 as will be described later. Thus, the player can visually recognize the movement of the front body 442 relative to each other.

  Next, the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The pair of left and right rotating units 500 are disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (see FIG. 6), and the pair of left and right rotating units 500 are formed in a symmetrical shape. Except for, it is formed with substantially the same configuration, so only one (the one disposed on the left side of the front view) will be described, and the description of the other will be omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a front view of the left-right rotation unit 500. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the left / right rotation unit 500 is arranged on the front surface of the front base 512, the front base 512 overlaid on the front side of the rear base 511 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the front base 513. A cover body 513 provided, a drive motor 520 disposed on the back side of the back surface base 511, a displacement member 530 rotated with respect to the back surface base 511 and the front base 512 by the driving force of the drive motor 520, And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530.

  On the opposing surfaces of the back base 511 and the cover body 513, shaft support holes 511a and 513a for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotary shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed at the same positions. Established. The front base 512 is formed with an opening 512a through which the rotation shaft 531 of the displacement member 530 is inserted, and an opening 512b through which an eccentric pin 542 of a crank gear 540 described later of the transmission mechanism is inserted.

  The displacement member 530 is a member having a blade-like decoration on the front, and mainly includes a rotation shaft 531 and a driven hole 532. As described above, the rotation shaft 531 is a shaft that is pivotally supported by the shaft base holes 511a and 513a of the back surface base 511 and the cover body 513, and the front surface and the back surface on the base end side (the lower side in FIG. 29) of the displacement member 530. Are projected from the same axis. The displacement member 530 can rotate between the retracted position overlapping the front base 512 in the front view and the projecting position projecting toward the opening 211a (see FIG. 8) of the rear case 210 with the rotation shaft 531 as the center of rotation. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

  The driven hole 432 is a hole in which a connecting pin 552 of a link member 550 (to be described later) of the transmission mechanism is rotatably supported, and is recessed at a position away from the rotating shaft 531 by a predetermined distance from the distal end side. As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 540 is transmitted to the driven hole 432 via the link member 550, whereby the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530, and is engaged with the pinion gear 521 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 520 and the pinion gear 521. A crank gear 540 and a link member 550 that connects the crank gear 453 to the displacement member 530 are mainly provided.

  The crank gear 540 is a gear that is rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the back base 511 and the front base 512, and an eccentric pin 541 is provided to project from the rotation center toward the front. The link member 550 is a rod-like body disposed between the opposed surfaces of the front base 512 and the displacement member 530, and a connecting hole 551 is recessed in the back surface on one end side in the longitudinal direction and the other end side in the longitudinal direction. The connecting pin 552 protrudes from the front of the.

  The eccentric pin 541 of the crank gear 540 is rotatably supported by the connection hole 551 of the link member 550 through the opening 512 b of the front base 512, and the connection pin 552 of the link member 550 is driven by the driven hole of the displacement member 530. 532 is rotatably supported. Thereby, the displacement member 530 and the crank gear 540 are connected via the link member 550, and a crank mechanism is comprised.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 520 is transmitted to the crank gear 540 via the pinion gear 521, and when the crank gear 540 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in this embodiment), The eccentric pin 541 that is eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the eccentric pin 541 is transmitted to the displacement member 530 via the link member 550. That is, the base end side of the displacement member 530 is alternately pushed and pulled in the left-right direction by the link member 550. Accordingly, the displacement member 530 is rotated between the above-described retracted position and the overhang position with the rotation shaft 431 as the rotation center (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the operation of the central floating unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the one positioned on the left side (left side in FIG. 31) and the right side (right side in FIG. 31) when the first member 440 is viewed from the front with respect to the pair of arm bodies 430, respectively. These are referred to as “left” arm body 430 and “right” arm body 430.

  FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, FIG. 31 (a) is in a state of being placed in the raised position, and FIG. 31 (b) is a view of the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 31C corresponds to the state of being arranged in the lowered position.

  32 (a) to 32 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, FIG. 32 (a) in FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 32 (b) in FIG. 31 (b). FIG. 32C corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 in FIG.

  32A to 32C correspond to cross-sectional views in which the back surface of the first member 440 is visually recognized by cutting along a plane orthogonal to the connecting pin 433. FIG. Further, the outer shapes of the left and right arm bodies 430 are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines, while the back body 443, the drive motor 450, and the crank member 446 are not illustrated. The same applies to FIG. 35, FIG. 36, FIG. 38, and FIG. 40, which will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), in the state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the raised position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing the tip end side (the connecting pin 433 side) upward. The first member 440 is positioned at the uppermost position. The connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are positioned in proximity to the terminal ends (hereinafter referred to as “outer terminal ends”) of the sliding grooves 441 a on the side close to the radially outer edge of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441.

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are driven to rotate from the state shown in FIGS. 31A and 32A and each crank gear 453 is rotated, the eccentric pin 454 of the crank gear 453 is driven to the driven groove 432. The left and right arm bodies 430 are respectively pushed downward while sliding.

  As a result, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotated about the rotation shaft 431 (see FIGS. 24 and 25), and the first member 440 is moved downward as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) and 32 (b). Displaced. From this state, when each crank gear 453 is further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 450, the left and right arm bodies 430 are further pushed downward, as shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c). Thus, the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), in the state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing down the tip side (the connecting pin 433 side) downward. The first member 440 is positioned at the lowermost position and is projected to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the rotating body 413 is exposed above the first member 440 so as to be visible to the player.

  The connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are positioned in proximity to the terminal ends (hereinafter referred to as “inner terminal ends”) of the sliding grooves 441 a on the side close to the center of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end of the sliding groove 441. In the present embodiment, the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end in the lowered position is set to be larger than the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end in the raised position.

  Thus, as described later, when the first member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member 430 using the action of inertia and the operation of the arm member 444 (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the lowered position is set. The relative displacement amount at can be increased. That is, the first member 440 can be operated with a large displacement on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are driven to rotate in the direction opposite to that described above from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), the rotation of each crank gear 453, As the eccentric pin 454 slides on the driven groove 432 and pushes the left and right arm bodies 430 upward, finally, as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (c), the central floating unit 400 is placed in the raised position.

  Thus, according to the central floating unit 400, the 1st member 440 can be raised / lowered between a raise position and a downward position. However, the above-described operation described as an example of raising and lowering the first member 440 is such that the first member 440 moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position. There is little change in movement.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the distal end sides (connection pins 433) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are the first ones. Since it is connected to the member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be capable of relative displacement (sliding), it can be moved up and down while changing the movement of the first member 440 according to the mode of rotation of the left and right arm bodies 430. it can. An example of such an operation will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c) and FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 33 (a) is in a state where it is disposed at the raised position. 33 (b), 33 (c), 10 (a) and 10 (b) are arranged between the raised position and the lowered position, and FIG. 10 (c) is arranged at the lowered position. Each corresponds to a state.

  35 (a) to 35 (c) and 36 (a) to 36 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c) 33 (a) to 33 (c) correspond to the cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, respectively, and FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are the center in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (c). Each corresponds to a sectional rear view of the idle unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), only the drive motor 450 corresponding to the right arm body 430 is rotationally driven from the state in which the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the raised position, and the tip side The right arm body 430 is rotated in the direction of rotation in which the (connecting pin 433) moves downward (downward in FIG. 33A) (hereinafter, this rotation is referred to as “downward rotation”).

  By the downward rotation of the right arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 pushes the sliding groove 441a downward, so that FIG. 33 (b) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) to the posture of lowering the right shoulder.

  Here, the left arm body 430 in the stopped state (on the right side in FIG. 35A) is, as shown in FIG. 237A, between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441a in the raised position. A predetermined gap is formed in the. In this case, when the first member 440 is changed (inclined) to the posture of lowering the right shoulder (lowering the left shoulder in FIG. 35B), the sliding groove 441a to which the connection pin 433 of the left arm body 430 is connected. Is inclined more steeply, and the direction of the gap formed between the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a is arranged to allow the movement (falling) of the first member 440 by the action of gravity. .

  Therefore, when only the right arm body 430 is rotated downward from the raised position shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), the first member 440 of the right arm body 430 is moved to a predetermined rotational position. While it can be displaced by being driven by rotation, after reaching a predetermined rotational position, the first member 440 is brought into the state shown in FIGS. 33B and 35B by free fall due to the action of gravity. Can be arranged.

  That is, until the right arm body 430 reaches the predetermined rotation position, the first member 440 that has been driven by the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is moved to the right arm body 430 after reaching the predetermined rotation position. Instead of following the downward rotation of the arm body 430, the arm body 430 can be rapidly displaced downward by a free fall to precede the displacement of the right arm body 430. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

  When the right arm body 430 is further rotated downward from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b), the connecting pin 433 of the right (left side in FIG. 35 (b)) arm 430 slides. By further pushing down the moving groove 441a, as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 35 (c), it is possible to further change (tilt) the posture of the first member 40 to lower the right shoulder to a steep angle. .

  In this case, the arm body 430 on the left (right side in FIG. 35B) is in a stopped state, and the connecting pin 433 reaches the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. The first member 440 can be rotated with the right side in (b) as the center of rotation. As the right arm body 430 is rotated downward, the first member 440 is viewed from the left arm body 430 side (when viewed from the front). The state pushed into the left side of FIG. 33 can be formed.

  That is, in the process from the raised position in FIG. 33A to the state shown in FIG. 33C, the first member 440 is moved downward (downward in FIG. 33) as the right arm body 430 rotates downward. ), A rotational motion in the direction of descending to the right (FIG. 33 clockwise), and a linear motion to the left (left direction in FIG. 33) can be displaced by Can change the movement.

  When the state shown in FIG. 33C and FIG. 35C is reached, in addition to the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 is located at the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. Therefore, the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is restricted. Therefore, from this state, the left arm body 430 (left side in FIG. 33 (c)) is then rotated downward.

  Due to the downward rotation of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 pushes the sliding groove 441a downward, so that FIG. 34 (a) and FIG. As shown in 36 (a), the first member 40 can be changed (returned) from the right-down shoulder posture to the horizontal posture.

  In an example of the operation described here, the left arm body 430 is further moved downward from the state shown in FIGS. 34A and 36A to a position regulated by the notch 422 of the cover body 420. Rotate. As a result, the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 (the right side in FIG. 36A) pushes the sliding groove 441a further downward, which is contrary to the case described above (see FIG. 33). As shown in b) and FIG. 36 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (tilted) to the posture of lowering the left shoulder.

  When reaching the state shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 36 (b), the left arm body 430 has already been rotated to the lowest position, and further downward rotation is restricted. From this state, Next, the right (left side in FIG. 34B) arm body 430 is rotated downward to a position regulated by the notch 422 of the cover body 420. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c), the first member 40 is changed (returned) from the posture of lowering the left shoulder to the horizontal posture, and is disposed at the lowest position. Can do. That is, it is arranged at the lowered position.

  As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be able to be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the front end sides (connections) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed. Since the pin 433) is connected to the first member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be capable of relative displacement (sliding), the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced independently of each other, so that the first member 440 moves linearly. It is possible to give a movement that combines a rotational movement and a change in the movement.

  In particular, the left and right arm bodies 430 have their base end sides (rotating shafts 431) rotatably supported by the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and are rotated around the base end sides. Each of the front end sides (connection pins 433) of 430 can be moved along arcuate trajectories having different center positions. As a result, compared to the case where the left and right arm bodies 430 are slid and displaced linearly, it is possible to give the first member 440 a motion that combines a linear motion and a rotational motion in a more complicated manner. Can be given to that movement.

  Here, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 arranged at the raised position or the lowered position is inertial with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 without rotating the left and right arm bodies 430. Relative displacement can be achieved by the action of inertia. The displacement of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, taking the displacement at the lowered position as an example.

  37 (a) to 37 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged at the lowered position. FIG. 37 (a) shows a state where the first member 440 is located at the center. In FIG. 37 (b) and FIG. 37 (c), the state in which the first member 440 rolls from side to side from the state illustrated in FIG. 37 (a) is illustrated.

  38 (a) to 38 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c) are the same as FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c). Each corresponds to a rear sectional view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 38 (a), in the state of being arranged at the lowered position (reference position), the connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are connected to the sliding grooves of the first member 440. It arrange | positions in the position which has a clearance gap between each of the outer terminal of 441a, and an inner terminal. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm bodies 430 can be allowed by the gap described above.

  For example, when one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced (rotated) at a predetermined speed and then stopped, the inertial force generated by the stop is applied to the first member 440, and each connecting pin 433 A displacement that reciprocates toward the outer end or the inner end of the sliding groove 441a can be formed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by inertia (inertial action). Can change the movement.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the pair of sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440 are each formed in a straight line and are arranged non-parallel, so that the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, When the one member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 by inertia (inertial action), a rotational component can be imparted to the movement of the first member 440. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right (rolled) not only in a linear motion but also in a combination of a linear motion and a rotational motion. As a result, the first member 440 changes to a motion of the first member 440. Can be given.

  Further, since each sliding groove 441a is formed in a straight line, when the connecting pin 433 slides along the sliding groove 441a due to the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430, resistance is reduced. It can be suppressed and slid smoothly. Thereby, the displacement of the first member 440 accompanying the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 can be stabilized, and the load on each drive motor 450 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in a substantially C shape, after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 in the left and right is converged and stopped, the first state is maintained in the stopped state. Member 440 can be maintained. Therefore, for example, in the state where an effect by another unit or a display device is performed and the central idle unit 400 is retracted to the raised position and stands by, the first member 440 can be suppressed from rattling with respect to the arm body 430. . As a result, wear of the sliding groove 441a and the connecting pin 433 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, when the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right by inertia (inertial action) after the arm body 430 is stopped, the first member maintains the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position. However, a structure that only moves linearly (that is, a conventional product in which the left and right arm bodies cannot be displaced independently) is impossible, and the left and right arm bodies 430 are independently displaced as in this embodiment. This is possible for the first time by making it possible. Thereby, a change can be given to the movement of the first member 440.

  That is, in the structure in which the first member only moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position (conventional product), even if the arm body is stopped, it acts on the first member as the arm stops. The inertial force to be generated cannot be a trigger for reciprocating (swaying) the first member from side to side.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, from the state where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture, only one arm body 430 is displaced (rotated) while the other arm body 430 is stopped. Since the one member 440 can be arranged at the reference position (for example, the lowered position) (see FIGS. 34 and 35), the inertial force accompanying the stop of the other arm body 430 is reciprocated left and right (rolling). ). As a result, the first member 440 can be reliably reciprocated left and right, and the amplitude of the left and right reciprocation can be increased.

  Here, the lowered position has been described as an example of the position where the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) left and right with inertia (inertial action) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430. Other locations are possible as possible. That is, in a state where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, as long as there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440, It may be the position of. Therefore, it is not limited to the ascending position or the descending position, and a reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at an arbitrary position between the ascending position and the descending position. Further, the rotational positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped need not be the same rotational position, and may be stopped at different rotational positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

  Next, an operation of reciprocating (rolling) the first member 440 left and right using the displacement of the arm member 444 of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. That is, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 is moved to the left and right arm bodies 430 even after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 left and right due to the inertia (inertia action) described above converges. Can be reciprocated left and right without rotating.

  39 (a) to 39 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 disposed at the lowered position. FIG. 39 (a) shows a state in which the first member 440 is located at the center. FIG. 39B and FIG. 39C show a state where the first member 440 is swayed from side to side from the state shown in FIG.

  40 (a) to 40 (c) are sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) are shown in FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c). Each corresponds to a rear sectional view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), in the state of being disposed at the lowered position (reference position), the connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are, as described above, the first member 440. Each of the sliding grooves 441a is disposed at a position having a gap between the outer end and the inner end. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm bodies 430 can be allowed by the gap described above.

  That is, since the arm member 444 is disposed on the back surface of the base 441, the first member 440 displaces (rotates) the arm member 444 by the driving force of the driving motor 445, and the reaction force is applied to the base 441. The connecting pin 433 can be reciprocated toward the outer end or the inner end of each sliding groove 441a by the reaction force. As a result, even if the left and right arm bodies 430 are in a stopped state, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right (rolled).

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 39A and 40A, the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped and the first member 440 is stopped with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, and the arm members As shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b), the arm member 444 is rotated clockwise from the front (clockwise) as shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b) so that the reaction force acts. Thus, the base body 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, and the arm member 444 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front as shown in FIGS. 39 (c) and 40 (c). Rotate around (clockwise).

  Thereby, the base body 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated in the clockwise direction (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front by the action of the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the arm member 444. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right (rolling), and the movement can be changed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the arm member 444 is rotatably supported by the base body 441 and rotated by the driving force applied from the drive motor 445, the first member 440 is not displaced by the arm member 444. The accompanying reaction force can be easily applied to the base body 441 and the front body 442 in the rotation direction. As a result, a rotation component can be easily generated in the movement of the base body 441 and the front body 442.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the center of rotation of the arm member 444 (the shaft 441c of the base 441) is positioned at the center in the left-right direction of the pair of connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430. It is possible to easily connect the force to the rotational movement of the first member 430 (the base body 441 and the front body 442).

  Here, the lowered position has been described as an example of the position where the first member 440 reciprocates left and right (rolls) by the reaction force during rotation of the arm member 444. However, as can be understood from the above configuration, It is also possible in position. That is, in a state where the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, as long as there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440, It may be the position of. Therefore, it is not limited to the ascending position or the descending position, and a reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at an arbitrary position between the ascending position and the descending position. Further, the rotational positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped need not be the same rotational position, and may be stopped at different rotational positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

  Here, a sensor device that detects the posture of the first member 440 may be provided, and control for changing the rotation state of the arm member 444 may be performed based on the detection result of the sensor device. Thereby, the movement of the 1st member 440 can be converged rapidly, or the 1st member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right (roll).

  For example, the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and with this stop, the first member 440 reciprocates left and right (sideways) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 due to inertia (action of inertia). When it is performed (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is rotated so as to weaken the reciprocation of the base body 441 and the front body 442 of the first member 440 (reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444). Is applied in a direction to cancel the movements of the base body 441 and the front body 442). Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged.

  Alternatively, from the state in which the movement of the first member 440 has converged and stopped, or the state in which the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolled) by inertia (inertial action), the first member 440 The base member 441 and the front body 442 are reciprocated or the arm member 444 is rotated so as to strengthen the reciprocation (the direction in which the reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444 is amplified in the motion of the base 441 and the front body 442). Act on). Accordingly, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right, and a change can be imparted to the left and right reciprocation of the first member 440 according to the rotation state of the arm member 444.

  As the sensor, an acceleration sensor (for example, an acceleration sensor (for example, a base member 441, a front body 442, a back body 443, etc.) that detects acceleration in three directions is provided in other parts of the first member 440 excluding the arm member 444. , Capacitance type, piezo type, etc.), distance sensors that detect the distance between the arm body 430 and the first member 440 (for example, a triangulation type, a time-of-flight type, etc.). The distance sensor is provided in at least two locations and configured to detect the relative posture of the first member 440 (base 441 or front body 442) with respect to the arm body 430.

  Next, the cooperation between the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  41 (a) is a front view of the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500, FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 taken along the line XLIc-XLIc in FIG.

  41 (a) to 41 (c) illustrate a state in which the central idle unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position and the left and right rotation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position. 41 (a) to 41 (c), the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, etc. are not shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding. Only the main components necessary for the description are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, when the left and right rotation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position in a state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, the first member 440 ( A pair of displacement members 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 are formed so as to be able to abut against a pair of cylindrical portions 441b standing on the back surface of the base body 441). Thereby, the movement of the first member 430 can be restricted.

  For example, when the central floating unit 400 placed at the raised position is placed at the lowered position by the downward rotation of the left and right arm bodies 430, the left and right turned unit 500 is placed at the extended position at the same time. By bringing the displacement member 530 into contact with the member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), the first member 440 reciprocates left and right due to inertia (inertia action) as described above (see FIGS. 37 and 38). (Rolling) can be controlled.

  Alternatively, when the arm member 444 of the first member 440 is displaced (rotated), the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), so that the first reaction is caused by the reaction of the displacement of the arm member 444. It is possible to restrict the members (base 441 and front body 442) from reciprocating left and right (rolling), whereby the front body 442 is maintained in a stopped state and only the arm member 444 is displaced. Can be made visible to the player.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arm is changed according to the disposition position of the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 (that is, by switching whether or not the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the cylindrical portion 441b). A mode in which the first member 540 (base 441 and front body 442) is displaced together with the arm member 444 by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the member 444, and the first member 540 (base 441 and front body 442) is maintained in a stopped state. A mode in which only the arm member 444 is displaced can be selectively formed.

  Next, the left / right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48. First, with reference to FIG.42 and FIG.43, the relationship between the left-right sensor apparatus 600 and the center floating unit 400 is demonstrated.

  42 (a) and 43 (a) are front views of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIGS. 42 (b) and 43 (b) are the XLIIb-XLIIb line of FIG. 42 (a) and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus 600 in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line | wire of a). 42 shows a state in which the first member 440 is disposed in the raised position, and in FIG. 43, the first member 440 is disposed in the lowered position.

  42 and 43, only the rear case 210, the first member 440, and the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16 are shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, and other components are not shown. Is done. 42 and 43, the path of light irradiated from the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light irradiated on the plate glass 16a are schematically shown by using two-dot chain lines. Illustrated. The same applies to FIGS. 44 and 45 to be described later, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the left / right sensor device 600 detects a player's finger in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16, and acquires the presence / absence (presence), position, operation direction, and operation speed thereof. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210. The first sensor 610 is disposed on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210. Established.

  The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light irradiated on the plate glass 16a are in the width direction of the plate glass 16a (FIG. 42A). (Left and right direction) The light emitting portion is disposed in an inclined posture inward so as to have an overlap at the center. Therefore, as described above, the sensor devices 610 and 620 are placed at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening portion (positions on the outer side in the width direction) across the opening portion of the game board 13 (center frame 86). It can be arranged, and can be difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

  In this case, it is the front of the glass plate 16a (FIG. 42 (a) front side of the paper, the lower side of FIG. 42 (b)), and obliquely forward of the irradiation areas S1 and S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting part). ), The light emitted from the light emitting unit and transmitted through the glass plate 16a is reflected by the player's fingers, and the reflected light is received by the light receiving unit. The presence of the person's finger is detected.

  The left and right sensor device 600 has the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 arranged on the left and right sides, and can perform detection at two positions in front of the glass sheet 16a (areas corresponding to the irradiation areas S1 and S2). Therefore, based on the detection results of both the sensors 610 and 620, the position of the player's finger (which position is in front of the irradiation area S1 or the irradiation area S2) and the operation direction (from the irradiation area S1 to the irradiation area S2). Direction or the opposite direction) or operation speed (speed when traversing between the irradiation areas S1 and S2) can be detected.

  Here, in the present embodiment, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 43, the light path of the left and right sensor device 600 (the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620) is set to overlap the movement region of the first member 440. Is done. In other words, the first member 440 is formed to be displaceable to a position that overlaps at least a part of the detection region of the left and right sensor device (the light path between the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the glass sheet 16a).

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the first member 440 is in front of the plate glass 16a (FIG. 43 (a) on the front side of FIG. 43, lower side of FIG. 43 (b)). , An area (hereinafter referred to as “detection area of the first sensor 610”) obliquely in front of the irradiation area S1 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610) and the front of the plate glass 16a. Thus, it is displaced to a position that divides an area (hereinafter referred to as a “detection area of the second sensor 620”) obliquely forward of the irradiation area S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620). It is possible.

  Thereby, in front of the plate glass 16a, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be reliably separated. Therefore, it is reliably avoided that the second sensor 620 detects the player's finger in the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the first sensor 610 detects the player's finger in the detection area of the second sensor 620, respectively. it can.

  Thus, for example, an effect that causes the player to select an alternative (for example, two positions on the left and right in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the position corresponding to the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620). A selection target (for example, a figure or a character) is displayed at two positions (corresponding to the detection area), and the player brings a finger close to one of the two areas (detection positions) corresponding to the selection target. Thus, when performing an effect of selecting one of them, the detection accuracy of the player's selection operation can be increased.

  Further, as described above, the central floating unit 400 is formed such that the left and right arm bodies 430 can be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the arm member 444 can be relatively displaced with respect to the first member 440 (base 441). Therefore, not only can the first member 440 be moved up and down linearly along the vertical direction, but the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right (see FIG. 39). Moreover, the stop position of the 1st member 440 can be biased to either one of the left-right direction (refer FIG.33 and FIG.34).

  Thereby, according to the movement (position) of the 1st member 440, the magnitude | size of at least one or both of the detection area of the 1st sensor 610 or the detection area of the 2nd sensor 620 can be changed. Thus, for example, the player moves his / her finger according to a change in the display mode of the selection target displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and searches for the position (detection region) where the finger is detected. It can be performed.

  In addition, for example, the first member 440 may block one of the detection area of the first sensor 610 or the detection area of the second sensor 620 so that the detection is impossible. In spite of the display instructing the player to select the selection target with fingers, the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas and interferes with the player's selection operation. It can be carried out. Alternatively, the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas, so that an instruction for prompting the player to select the other can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  44 (a) is a front view of the left / right sensor device 600, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left / right sensor device 600 taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a).

  As described above, in the first member 440, the front body 442 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) are disposed therein, and the plurality of light emitting means emit light (light on or turn off). By blinking), the light transmitted through the front surface and the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be irradiated from the front surface and the outer peripheral surface to the outside. Thereby, a player can be made to visually recognize so that the whole (front surface and outer peripheral surface) of the front body 442 may emit light.

  In this case, when light emitted from the front body 442 of the first member 440 (particularly, the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, the light is incident. Interference between the reflected light and the light emitted from the light emitting part occurs, and the light receiving part directly receives the incident light, thereby causing erroneous detection.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the light irradiated to the outside from the front body 442 (particularly the outer peripheral surface) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. The displacement member 530 can be displaced to a position that can be shielded (a position that crosses a virtual line connecting the front body 442 and the sensors 610 and 620 (broken line arrow in FIG. 44B), hereinafter referred to as “shielding position”). Formed. Therefore, when the light emitting unit of the front body 442 emits light, the sensors 610 and 620 can be shielded from the light emitted from the light emitting unit by the displacement member 530 by displacing the displacement member 530 to the shielding position. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensors 610 and 620 can be suppressed.

  In addition, in this manner, the displacement member 530 is also used as a means for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, so that the permanent shielding member can be used. Since it is not necessary to provide them, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member 530 can be retracted from the shielding position, and accordingly, a space can be secured as compared with the case where a permanent shielding member is provided. Therefore, the space secured by retracting the displacement member 530 can be used as a space for displacement of other displacement members.

  Further, the first member 440 (front body 442) is formed so as to be able to move up and down between the raised position and the lowered position (see FIGS. 33 and 34), and depending on the displacement position of the first member 440, The displacement member 530 can be displaced (rotated) and placed at the shielding position. That is, the displacement member 530 can follow the movement of the first member 440. Therefore, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530 regardless of the arrangement (elevated position) of the first member 440.

  That is, when a permanent shielding member is provided so as to correspond to the entire movable range of the first member 440, a large space is required for the arrangement of the shielding member. Since the first member 440 can be displaced to the shielding position according to the displacement (elevating position) of the first member 440, the displacement member 530 can be reduced in size. Therefore, not only can the permanent shielding member be made unnecessary, but it is possible not only to achieve a reduction in component costs and a sufficient space, but also to reduce the burden on the drive motor 520 for driving the displacement member 530.

  Next, the relationship between the left / right sensor device 600 and the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  45 (a) is a front view of the left / right sensor device 600, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left / right sensor device 600 taken along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 45, the left and right rotation unit 500 is formed such that the left and right displacement members 530 can be displaced (rotated) between a retracted position (see FIG. 7) and an extended position (see FIG. 8). A sensor (not shown) for detecting that the left and right displacement members 530 are disposed at the retracted position and the extended position is provided. The left and right displaced members 530 are disposed between the retracted position and the extended position. Are formed so as to overlap (cross) the detection region of the first sensor 610 and the detection region of the second sensor 620, respectively.

  The left / right sensor device 600 is formed such that each sensor 610, 620 can independently detect that each displacement member 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 is disposed at an intermediate position (predetermined position). Accordingly, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided with means for detecting the presence or absence of the object F (see FIG. 46) in front of the glass plate 16a and means for detecting the disposition of the displacement member 530 at the intermediate position. It can be combined. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is disposed at the intermediate position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  It should be noted that the position where each displacement member 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 is detected by each sensor 610, 620 of the left / right sensor device 600 may be an overhang position instead of the intermediate position. Since it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is disposed at the extended position, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a method for detecting the dirt D of the glass sheet 16a by the left and right sensor device 600 will be described.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16, and correspond to FIG. 42 (b). In FIG. 46, the path of light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. 42A, the object F existing in the detection region of the first sensor 610 is contaminated with the dirt D attached to the irradiation region S1 (see FIG. 42A), respectively. It is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, for example, when the object F (player's finger) is present in the detection area of the first sensor 610 (see FIG. 42), the light is emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610. The light passes through the plate glass 16a while being refracted at a predetermined refraction angle, then is reflected by the object F, and is received by the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610 by following the same path as the forward path. Accordingly, the presence of the player's finger is detected by the first sensor 610.

  In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit facing inward (see FIG. 42), and as described above, It is possible to dispose each of the sensors 610, 620 from the player, with the opening interposed therebetween (see FIG. 6) deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (a position on the outer side in the width direction). It can be made difficult.

  However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 46B, the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 with respect to the plate glass 16a becomes large (the incident direction and the plate glass 16a become nearly parallel to each other). Therefore, if dirt D (for example, a greasy hand of a player's hand) adheres to the glass plate 16a, the dirt D causes light to be reflected in a direction different from the forward path, and the reflected light is reflected to the first sensor 610. The light receiving unit cannot receive light. Therefore, the first sensor 610 cannot detect the presence or absence of dirt D on the plate glass 16a.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are disposed in an inclined posture with the light emitting part and the light receiving part facing inward, so that the irradiation region S1 of the plate glass 16a is contaminated. When D is attached, the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 can be detected by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620, and thereby the stain D on the irradiation region S1 on the plate glass 16a. The presence or absence of adhesion can be detected. In addition, the presence or absence of dirt D in the irradiation region S2 can be determined based on whether or not the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610 detects the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the second sensor 620.

  That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 is received by the light receiving unit of the second sensor 620, the dirt D adheres to the irradiation region S1, and is received by the light receiving unit of the second sensor 620. If not, it can be respectively determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation area S1. Similarly, when the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the second sensor 620 is received by the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610, dirt D adheres to the irradiation region S2, and the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610 If no light is received, it can be determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation region S2.

  Here, the detection of the presence or absence of dirt D on the glass sheet 16a by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 is preferably performed in the process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, since no player has entered the store, the object F (the player's finger) does not exist in front of the glass plate 16a (the detection area of each sensor 610, 620). Therefore, a distinction between the object F and the dirt D (for example, based on the difference between the path length when reflected by the object and the path length when reflected by the dirt D, a threshold is set for the time required from light emission to light reception. This is because the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of the dirt D on the plate glass 16a can be increased accordingly.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47A is a side view of the container 330 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVIIb in FIG. 47A. Note that FIG. 47A corresponds to FIG. 47A and 47B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

  In 1st Embodiment, when the drive motor 350 was rotationally driven, the case where the rotation was always transmitted by the transmission mechanism to the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b was demonstrated, However, Transmission in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. The mechanism is formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be intermittently transmitted to the second rotating body 340b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (d), the transmission mechanism in the second embodiment is in mesh with the drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 in order. A gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 2353, an intermediate gear 2354, and a second gear 2355.

  The first gear 2353 differs from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the number of teeth, and other configurations are the same. Note that the number of teeth of the first gear 2353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 2355 differs from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and the other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the second gear 2355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 2354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355, and the two gears (the first intermediate gear 2354a and the second intermediate gear 2354b) are arranged in the axial direction (FIG. 47). (B) It is formed as an integrated member concentrically and integrated in the left-right direction).

  The first side intermediate gear 2354a is formed with teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 2353 over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 2353 (the first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 2354 (the first intermediate gear 2354a and the second intermediate gear 2354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. The The first side intermediate gear 2354a has 21 teeth.

  The second side intermediate gear 2354b is formed as the same gear as that of the first side intermediate gear 2354a except that a part of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a is omitted. Specifically, the second-side intermediate gear 2354b includes a non-engagement region in which seven teeth are omitted (removed) and a remaining region of the non-engagement region (that is, 14 teeth around the second tooth). A meshing region that is a continuous region in the direction).

  In the non-engagement region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b, the teeth are omitted (removed) and cannot be meshed with the teeth of the second gear 2355, so that the transmission of rotation from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355 is transmitted. Blocked. On the other hand, in the meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b, it is possible to mesh with the teeth of the second gear 2355, and rotation is transmitted from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355.

  In this case, the non-engagement region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b is a region formed by omitting seven teeth with respect to the first side intermediate gear 2354a in which the number of teeth is set to 21. Since the center angle is 120 degrees and the meshing area is an area corresponding to the remaining 14 teeth, the center angle is 240 degrees.

  Therefore, the second rotating body 340b is stopped in a section corresponding to a non-engagement region where the second side intermediate gear 2354b and the second gear 2355 are non-engaged, and the second side intermediate gear 2354b and In the section corresponding to the start area where the second gear 2355 is engaged, the second gear 2355 is rotated. Therefore, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 360 degrees, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated 360 degrees, while the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 240 degrees.

  Next, the rotating operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 48 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 49 and 50 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. 49 (e) to 49 (e) are the same as FIG. In the state shown as 1 to 5, FIGS. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 9, respectively.

  48 to 50, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are used for the second rotation by using the symbols “A to C”. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the body 340a are respectively illustrated using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, the state where the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 (a)), respectively. ) Is hereinafter referred to as “initial state”. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is set to a boundary position on one side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (end of the meshing region, start of the non-meshing region). (See FIG. 47 (a)).

  No. of FIG. 1 and FIG. 49A, the first display board 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display board 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the viewing positions (No. in FIG. 48). 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, and the second display panel 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b becomes the intermediate gear 2354 (the first gear). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the non-engagement region in the two-side intermediate gear 2354b) and is maintained in the stopped state.

  As a result, No. in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49B, the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  In FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is disposed at the boundary position on the other side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the start end of the meshing region, the end of the non-meshing region). Is done.

  No. of FIG. 2 and FIG. 49B, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the meshing area (the first half of the central angle of 240 degrees).

  As a result, No. in FIG. 3 and FIG. 49C, the second rotating body 340b places the second display plate 343B at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  No. of FIG. 3 and FIG. 49 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated by 120 degrees by the action of the meshing area (the second half of the central angle of 240 degrees).

  As a result, No. in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 49 (d), the second rotating body 340 b places the third display plate 343 </ b> C at the viewing position. Thereby, the fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  In FIG. 4 and 49 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is arranged at one boundary position between the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the end of the meshing region, the start of the non-meshing region). Is done.

  Subsequent steps are substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 49A in FIG. 48 to the state shown in No. 3 and FIG. 49C in FIG. 48). By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, no. 4-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 6, it may be considered that the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49A to 49C is changed by 120 degrees, and the fifth combination (No in FIG. 48) is considered. .5 “C ′, B”) and the sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 48).

  In addition, in FIG. 7-No. 9 may be replaced with a state where the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) is varied by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. in FIG. 48) may be considered. .7 “B ′, A”), the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48), and the ninth combination (No. 9 “C ′, C” in FIG. 48). be able to.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train including a plurality of gears, No. 1 gear (intermediate gear 2354) meshes with the mating gear (second gear 2355) and transmits rotation, and the mating gear disengages from the mating gear and blocks rotation transmission. A non-engaged region is formed.

  Thereby, since the 2nd rotary body 340b can be temporarily stopped, rotating the 1st rotary body 340a, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form nine combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combination can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to produce an effective effect by rotating each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the component cost.

  In particular, according to this embodiment, there are two states: a state in which the second rotating body 340b is stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, and a state in which both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. A state can be formed. That is, the rotation of the second rotator 340b can be stopped while rotating the first rotator 340a, and the rotation of the second rotator 340b can be released and restarted. The interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of figures of the second rotating body 340b can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 48 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 forward and reverse. Therefore, for example, the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) appears from the state where the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 48) is formed. 48, the table shown in FIG. 48 is advanced in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 48) to display the eighth combination, and the table in FIG. 48 is advanced in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 48). Thus, the ninth combination can also appear.

  As a result, as in the former case, No. 4 in FIG. 7 to No. 8, with the second rotator 340 b stopped, only the first rotator 340 a is rotated to reveal the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48). (Ie, “B ′” is already appearing on one side and “A” is switched from “A” to “B” and “B ′, B” appears on the other side) and the latter As in the case of FIG. 9 to No. 8, both the first rotator 340 a and the second rotator 340 b are rotated so that the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) appears (that is, one of them). And the other graphic can be selected and executed in accordance with the game state.

  In the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a seven times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is performed twice. Therefore, a desired combination of figures can be quickly displayed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a non-engagement region is formed in the intermediate gear 2354 (second intermediate gear 2354b), and the rotation and stop of the second rotator 340b are performed while the first rotator 340a is rotating. Are switched and the combination of figures is changed. In this case, the formation range of the non-engagement region in the intermediate gear 2354 is set corresponding to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. That is, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are respectively provided with the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C, and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces are arranged at intervals of 120 degrees. The formation range (center angle) of the region is set to 120 degrees.

  Thereby, since the phase of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is not shifted, the table shown in FIG. 48 includes a combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b as an element. The length can be shortened (the number of table stages is reduced). Therefore, the rotation speed of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b required in order to make a desired figure combination appear can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to shorten the time required for making a desired figure combination appear.

  However, the formation range of the non-engagement region in the intermediate gear 2354 may be set in a non-corresponding manner to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. For example, when the formation range of the non-engagement region is set to a range of the central angle of 108 degrees, as in the case of the first embodiment, a phase shift between the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b occurs. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of combinations (for example, 9 sets) of graphics, and it is also possible to form a state where the graphics are not combined, and to allow the player to visually recognize the displacement of the graphics (the combination is not established).

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51A is a side view of the container 330 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 51B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIb in FIG. FIG. 51 (a) corresponds to FIG. 18 (a). 51A and 51B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where one non-engagement region and one engagement region are formed in the intermediate gear 2354 has been described. However, the intermediate gear 3354 in the third embodiment includes a non-engagement region and a tooth. Two joint regions are formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51D, the transmission mechanism in the third embodiment is engaged with a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 in order. A gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 3353, an intermediate gear 3354, and a second gear 3355.

  The first gear 3353 differs from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and the other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the first gear 3353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 3355 is different from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment in the number of teeth and the thickness dimension, and other configurations are the same. The number of teeth of the second gear 3355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 3354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355, and the two gears (the first intermediate gear 3354a and the second intermediate gear 3354b) are axially moved (FIG. 51). (B) It is formed as an integrated member concentrically and integrated in the left-right direction).

  The first side intermediate gear 3354a is formed with teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 3353 over the entire circumference. Accordingly, while the first gear 3353 (the first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 3354 (the first intermediate gear 3354a and the second intermediate gear 3354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation. The The first side intermediate gear 3354a has 35 teeth.

  The second side intermediate gear 3354b is formed as the same gear as that of the first side intermediate gear 3354a except that a part of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a is omitted. Specifically, the second intermediate gear 3354b includes a first non-engagement region X1 and a second non-engagement region X2, which are regions where seven teeth are omitted (removed), and the first teeth. From the first meshing region Y1 that is located in one between the joint region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2 and in which seven teeth are continuous in the circumferential direction, and the first toothing region Y1 The second meshing region Y2 is a region in which 14 phases are located in the circumferential direction and are located on the other side between the first meshing region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2 with a phase difference of 180 degrees. And are formed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is rotated 120 degrees in the first meshing region Y1. At the same time, in the second meshing region Y2, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) can be rotated by 240 degrees. On the other hand, in the first non-engagement region X1 and the second non-engagement region X2, the first rotator 340a (first gear 3353) while the second rotator 340b (second gear 3355) is stopped. ) Can be rotated 120 degrees each.

  Next, the rotation operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the third embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 52 is a table showing graphic combinations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 53 and 54 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. FIG. 53 (d) to FIG. 54A and 54B are the same as those shown in FIG. These correspond to the states shown as 5 and 6, respectively.

  52 to 54, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by the reference numerals "A to C", and the second rotation is performed. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the body 340a are respectively illustrated using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, as in the case of the second embodiment, the initial state in the third embodiment is that the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotator 340b are in the viewing position. Arranged. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the end of the first meshing region Y1, the first Of the non-engagement region X1) (see FIG. 51A).

  52 of FIG. 1 and FIG. 53 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. in FIG. 52). 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b becomes the intermediate gear 3354 (the first gear). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the first non-engagement region X1 in the two-side intermediate gear 3354b) and is maintained in the stopped state.

  As a result, no. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53 (b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state in which the first display plate 343A is disposed at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is at the boundary position between the first non-engagement region X1 and the second engagement region Y2 (the start end of the second engagement region Y2 and the end of the first non-engagement region X1). Be placed.

  52 of FIG. 2 and FIG. 53 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The intermediate gear 3354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing area Y2 (the first seven teeth of the 14 teeth).

  As a result, no. 3 and FIG. 53 (c), the second rotating body 340b places the second display plate 343B at the viewing position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  52 of FIG. 3 and FIG. 53 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The intermediate gear 3354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing area Y2 (seven teeth in the latter half of the 14 teeth).

  As a result, no. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 53 (d), the second rotating body 340 b places the third display plate 343 </ b> C at the viewing position. Thereby, the fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. 4 and FIG. 53 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is arranged at the boundary position between the second meshing region Y2 and the second non-meshing region X2 (the end of the second meshing region Y2, the start of the second non-meshing region). Is done.

  52 of FIG. 4 and FIG. 53 (d), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the second non-engagement region X2 in the intermediate gear 3354b) and is maintained in the stopped state.

  As a result, no. As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 54 (a), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state in which the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the fifth combination (No. 5 “C ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. 5 and FIG. 54A, the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 480 degrees (120 degrees × 4) from the initial state (see FIG. 53A). The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the second non-engagement region X2 and the first engagement region Y1 (the end of the second non-engagement region X, the first engagement). It is arranged at the start end of the region Y1.

  52 of FIG. 5 and FIG. 54 (a), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The intermediate gear 3354b) is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (seven teeth).

  As a result, no. 6 and FIG. 54 (b), the second rotating body 340b places the first display plate 343A at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  In FIG. 6 and the state shown in FIG. 54B, the intermediate gear 3354 is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53A). That is, the intermediate gear 3354 is returned to the initial state, and the phase with respect to the second gear 3355 has a boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the first meshing region Y1). It is set to the end, the first end of the first non-engagement region X1 (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Therefore, in the following, the aspect described above (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 (a) to the state shown in No. 6 in FIG. 52 and FIG. 54 (b)) is substantially performed. The same aspect is repeated. As a result, nine combinations can be formed in one cycle (one round from the start point to the end point of the table). In the present embodiment, the number of stages in one cycle table is 15.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is formed as a gear train including a plurality of gears, The first gear (intermediate gear 3354) has a meshing region (first and second meshing regions Y1, Y2) that meshes with the other gear (second gear 3355) and transmits rotation, and the other gear (second gear 3355). A non-engagement region (first and second non-engagement regions Y1, Y2) that forms non-engagement with the gear and blocks transmission of rotation is formed.

  Thereby, since the 2nd rotary body 340b can be temporarily stopped, rotating the 1st rotary body 340a, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form nine combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combination can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to produce an effective effect by rotating each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the component cost.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the intermediate gear 3354 has two non-engagement regions (first and second non-engagement regions X1, X2) that block transmission of rotation to the second gear 3355. The toothed regions and the non-toothed regions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, for example, in FIG. 4 to No. As shown by 7, the rotation of the second rotating body 340 b can be continuously stopped by two types of figures. Therefore, the expectation and interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figures of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b can be enhanced.

  In addition, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 52 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 forward and reverse. Therefore, for example, the table of FIG. 4 to No. By switching forward and reverse between 7 and 7, the rotational speeds of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b can be visually recognized by making the player different.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a top view of the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55B is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LVb in FIG. 55A. FIG. 55 (c) is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 in a state where the arm body 4430 is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). In FIG. 55, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of the base body 410, the cover body 420, and the like is omitted, and only main components necessary for the description are illustrated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 and the connecting pin 433 is formed in the arm body 430 has been described. However, the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin in the fourth embodiment are described. 4449 are formed on the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440, respectively. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (c), the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has sliding grooves 4439 formed in the respective distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 4430, and those A pair of connecting pins 4449 inserted through the respective sliding grooves 4439 is provided so as to protrude from the back surface of the first member 4440.

  The sliding groove 4439 is formed as an opening having a long hole shape in a front view that extends linearly, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the arm body 4430. The connecting pin 4449 is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section that can slide along the sliding groove 441a. Via the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449, the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440 are connected so as to be relatively movable. Note that a collar having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 441a is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 4449 as a stopper.

  Thus, according to the central floating unit 400 in this embodiment, the pair of arm bodies 4430 and the first member 4440 are formed by the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449 slidably inserted into the sliding groove 4439. Since the connecting pin 4449 protrudes from the first member 4440 and the sliding groove 4439 is formed in the pair of arm bodies 4430, by adjusting the displacement position (rotation angle) of the arm body 4430, The direction (tilt angle) of the sliding groove 4439 can be changed.

  That is, when the rotation of the arm member 4430 is stopped and the first member 4440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by inertia (inertial action) (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is displaced (rotated). ), When the first member 4440 is reciprocated left and right (rolled) by the action of the reaction force generated (see FIGS. 39 and 40), the rotation angle of the arm member 4430 is adjusted to By changing the relative angle between the sliding grooves 4439, the mode of reciprocation of the first member 4440 can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the pair of sliding grooves 4439 are arranged in a substantially C shape, as described above, a rotation component can be applied, so the first member 440 is In addition to linear motion, the motion can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right by a motion that combines rotational motion with linear motion.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, by changing the displacement position (rotation angle) of the pair of arm bodies 4430, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (the opposing angle of the letter C) is adjusted. As a result, the aspect of the reciprocating motion of the first member 4440 to the left and right can be changed.

  For example, by reducing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (decreasing the opposing angle of the letter C), the rotational component is increased, and the first member 4440 reciprocates left and right (rolling). The rate of rotational movement can be increased. On the other hand, by increasing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (increasing the opposing angle of the letter C), the rotational component is reduced, and the first member 4440 reciprocates left and right (rolling). The rate of linear motion can be increased.

  In particular, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the pair of sliding grooves 4439 can be arranged in a straight line, so that no rotation component is generated and the first member 4440 is moved to the left and right. Can be reciprocated (rolled) only by linear motion. That is, a mode in which the first member 4440 moves horizontally in the left-right direction can be formed.

  As described above, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 is changed to change the aspect of the first member 4440 reciprocating left and right (including the rotational component and the rotational component). The first embodiment in which the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 (base 441) cannot be achieved. This is possible for the first time by forming the sliding groove 4439 at the tip. Thereby, a change can be given to the movement of the first member 4440.

  Next, the central idle unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. 56 (a) and 57 (a) are front views of the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) are the central floating unit 400. 4 is a cross-sectional rear view of the left / right rotation unit 5500. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 56B and FIG. 57B correspond to FIG. 56 and 57, the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, etc. are not shown in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, and the main parts necessary for the description are omitted. Only the configuration is shown.

  The left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment is arranged at a lower position in the overhang position than the left / right rotation unit 500 (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Therefore, when the left and right rotation unit 5500 is disposed at the extended position in a state where the central floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, the first member 440 of the central floating unit 400 (by the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 5500). The pair of cylindrical portions 441b standing on the back surface of the base body 441) can be pushed down.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the left and right displacement members 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 are alternately arranged at the overhanging position in a state where the central floating unit 400 is arranged at the lowered position (one side is stretched). The first member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right (sideways) by repeating the operation of slightly retracting the other from the protruding position while being arranged at the extended position.

  In this case, the operation of disposing the left and right displacement members 530 alternately at the extended position, the operation of retreating from the extended position, and the operation of the first member 440 reciprocating (rolling) to the left and right. The left and right displacement members 530 may be displaced (rotated) so as to be linked (synchronized) with each other. The first member 440 and the whole of the left and right displacement members 530 can be linked together to form a movement that swings up, down, left, and right, allowing the player to recognize a large movement with a sense of unity.

  Alternatively, one of the left and right displacement members 530 collides with the first member 440 (cylinder part 441b), and the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by the reaction (inertia) generated by the collision, and predetermined. After the elapse of time, the other of the left and right displacement members 530 may then collide with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), and the first member 440 may continue to reciprocate left and right (roll). The player can recognize the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 in the left and right directions.

  Thus, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right without displacing the arm body 430. That is, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 is moved with respect to the arm body 430 by inertia (action of inertial force) when the upward rotation or downward rotation of the arm body 430 of the central floating unit 400 is stopped. In addition to the form of reciprocating left and right, the form of reciprocating the first member 440 left and right using the displacement of the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 without using the inertial force resulting from the displacement of the arm body 430 Can also be formed.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the end face plate 342 of the second rotating body 340b is fixed to the second gear 355 has been described. However, the second rotating body 6340b in the sixth embodiment is second to the end face plate 6342. The gear 6355 can be relatively rotated. In addition, while the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, while the description is abbreviate | omitted, in this embodiment, it is the same as 1st rotary body 340a among the structures of 2nd rotary body 6340b. The components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a front exploded perspective view of the second rotating body 6340b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 58, the second rotating body 6340b includes a fixed shaft 6341, a pair of end face plates 6342 rotatably supported by shaft portions 6341a at both axial ends of the fixed shaft 6341, and the pair of ends. Three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) provided between the face plates 6342 are mainly provided.

  The fixed shaft 6341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the container 6330, and connects the pair of shaft portions 6341a and the pair of shaft portions 6341a that are positioned at both ends in the axial direction. And a body portion 6341b.

  The shaft portion 6341a is formed of a hard resin material and extends beyond the longitudinal dimension of the shaft support portion 6342b. The shaft straight section has a slightly smaller circular shape than the shaft support hole 6342a of the end face plate 6342. At the same time, it is held non-rotatably in the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side wall bodies 332 and 333. Note that the shaft portion 6341a may be formed of a metal material in order to ensure strength.

  Here, the shaft portion 6341a has a smaller diameter than the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17), but a circular fixing member (the outer peripheral shape is held between the holding holes 332a and 333a and the shaft portion 6341a). A member (not shown) having a slightly smaller shape than the inner peripheral shape of the holes 332a and 333a and having an inner peripheral shape slightly larger than the shaft portion 6341a (not shown) is interposed, and the holding holes 332a and 333a and the shaft portion 6341a. In addition, the shaft portion 6341a is fixed to the holding holes 332a and 333a by bonding and fixing the circular fixing members with an adhesive or the like. The fixing means is not limited to the adhesive, and various methods can be adopted. For example, you may make it fix with a fastening screw.

  The trunk portion 6341b has a length in the axial direction (length in the left-right direction in FIG. 58) shorter than the length in the longitudinal direction of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. The connecting portion 6342c of the end face plate 6342 can be projected over the portion to be disposed.

  The end face plate 6342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a cylindrical shaft support portion 6342b extending in the axial direction at the center portion, and a shaft support hole 6342a provided at the center of the shaft support portion 6342b. And a three-pronged connecting portion 6342c that connects the end surface of the shaft supporting portion 6342b with the end surface of the end face plate 6342 offset to the inner side (center side of FIG. 58) of the second rotating body 6340b. A gap 6342d is generated around the radial direction of 6342b.

  The shaft support portion 6342b is a column-shaped shaft support body 6342b1 extending outward from the central portion of the coupling portion 6342c, and extends outward from the shaft support body 6342b1 and is supported by an eccentric position in the circumferential direction. And a power switching unit 6342b2 having a swinging engagement piece 6342bt.

  The shaft support body 6342b1 extends to the vicinity of the end of the gap 6342b.

  The engagement piece 6342bt is capable of swinging a region cut into a dogleg shape in the axial cross section of the power switching unit 6342b2, and has a first state in which a tip projects outside the outer shape of the power switching unit 6342b2. This is a member that can form a second state in which the tip is inside the outer shape of the power switching unit 6342b2. The first state and the second state are both states in which the engagement piece 6342bt is arranged at the end of the region of the power switching portion 6342b2 cut into a square shape, and the engagement piece 6342bt is a torsion spring or the like. Urging means (for example, one end is disposed and fixed inside the shaft main body 6342b1 and the other end is pressed against the engaging piece 6342bt, not shown), is in the first state (FIG. 59 ( d)).

  In the connecting portion 6342c, the central portion of the end surface on the inner side in the axial direction is brought into contact (per surface) with the end surfaces on both axial sides of the body portion 6341b. Thereby, it can suppress that the connection part 6342c inclines with respect to the trunk | drum 6341b, and it can suppress that the load of an axial radial direction is applied to the axial part 6341a. Moreover, the connection part 6342c is provided with the sensor part 6342c1 comprised from a non-contact magnetic sensor in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the plate part comprised in trifurcation.

  The sensor unit 6342c1 is in a posture in which the detection surface faces the outside of the coupling unit 6342c (the axially outer side of the second rotating body 6340b), and approaches the detection unit 6355c formed in the second gear 6355, so that the second rotation The phase relationship between the body 6340b and the second gear 6355 can be detected.

  In addition, since sensor part 6342c1 is arrange | positioned at the end surface plate 6342, there exists a possibility that the wiring of sensor part 6342c1 may twist by rotation of the 2nd rotary body 6340b. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a brush-type contact (not shown) is projected in the radial direction of the body 6341b, and surrounds the body 6341b in a manner that can slide with the brush-type contact and A metal ring-shaped slip ring (not shown) that is rotatable around 6341b is disposed. By connecting the wiring of the sensor unit 6342c1 to the slip ring, it is possible to prevent the wiring of the sensor unit 6342c1 from being twisted while enabling power supply to the sensor unit 6342c.

  As viewed in the axial direction of the shaft support hole 6342a, the gap 6342d extends to the connecting portion 6342b, and the axial straight section has a circular shape larger than the outer diameter of the second gear 6355. As a result, the second gear 6355 can be disposed in such a manner as to project toward the gap 6342d.

  The second gear 6355 is a gear member that transmits the driving force of the driving motor 350 (see FIG. 59) to the second rotating body 6340b, and has an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the shaft main body 6341b along the thickness direction at the center. A recessed portion 6355a that is recessed from the side facing the end surface plate 6342, and a hole that extends from the end opposite to the end surface plate 6342b of the recessed portion 6455a toward the outside (the opposite side of the end surface plate 6342b). A power switching hole 6355b, and a detection portion 6355c that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral surface of the end portion of the second gear 6355 in the axial direction inner side (the side facing the end face plate 6342) and is made of a magnetic material. Is mainly provided. With such a configuration, the second gear 6355 includes an opening in which the recessed portion 6355a and the power switching hole 6355b are continuously provided. As shown in FIG. 58, in the present embodiment, the thickness of the teeth of the second gear 6355 in the axial direction differs between the left and right second gears 6355, but since the technical idea is the same, description will be made without distinction.

  The second gear 6355 is rotatably supported by the shaft support body 6342b1 by the recessed portion 6355a. At this time, since the recessed portion 6355a is accommodated in the region of the gap 6342d, the entire region on the outer side in the axial direction of the end face plate 342 is used as a region for forming the first wall surface 6355b1 and the second wall surface 6355b2 of the power switching hole 6355b. be able to. Therefore, in order to reinforce the first wall surface 6355b1 and the second wall surface 6355b2, the container 6330 (see FIG. 59) is also required when the first wall surface 6355b1 and the second wall surface 6355b2 need to be formed wider in the axial direction. It is possible to prevent changing the horizontal dimension of.

  The power switching hole 6355b is arranged at equal intervals (in this embodiment, divided into 12 parts, that is, at intervals of 30 degrees), and is curved in the radial direction and extended to the first wall surface 6355b1 and the adjacent first wall surface. 6355b1 is formed in a circular saw shape including a second wall surface 6355b2 extending in a manner of connecting one radial inner end and the other radial outer end.

  The first wall surface 6355b1 is disposed at a position where the radially outer end of the power switching hole 6355b can abut on the engagement piece 6342bt arranged in the first state. In a state in which the wall surface 6355b1 is in contact with the wall surface 6355b1, the engagement piece 6342bt has a curved shape (see FIG. 60E) along the swing locus of the portion with the largest diameter. Accordingly, when the second gear 6355 rotates in a sliding direction with respect to the engagement piece 6342bt, the engagement piece 6342bt can be easily arranged in the first state at a small phase difference, and the second gear 6355 is provided. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag between the start of rotation of the second gear 6355 and the start of rotation of the end face plate 6342 when the motor is reversely rotated.

  The detection portions 6355c are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the second gear 6355 (in this embodiment, divided into 12 portions, that is, at intervals of 30 degrees), and the engagement pieces 6342bt slide with respect to the second gear 6355. When the second gear 6355 rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. 59 (e), the side surface of the engagement piece 6342bt contacts the first wall surface 6355b1 in a phase relationship where the sensor unit 6342c1 starts detecting the detection unit 6355c. The mode (see FIG. 60 (e)) is used.

  FIG. 59A is a side view of the housing 6330 in which the second rotating body 6340b is disposed in the direction of the arrow LIXa in FIG. 58, and FIG. 59B is the direction of the arrow LXIIb in FIG. FIG. 59C is a side view of the container 6330 viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIc in FIG. 59B, and FIG. 59D is a front view of the container 6330 in FIG. 59B. FIG. 59E is a partially enlarged side view of the second rotating body 6340b in FIG. 59C. 59A and 59B show a state where the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed, and in FIG. 59C, the side wall body 333 is further removed. The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 59A to 59C, transmission paths for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 350 are formed at both ends of the rotators 340a and 6340b, and the rotator 340a is included in each of the transmission paths. , 6340b are connected with different gears (intermediate gears).

  In the present embodiment, the intermediate gear 354 described in the first embodiment is disposed on the first transmission path FL1 (see FIG. 59A) formed on the left side when viewed from the front, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front. In the second transmission path FL2 (see FIG. 59C), the intermediate gear 2354 described in the second embodiment is disposed. Thereby, the rotation pattern of the rotators 340a and 6340b can be changed depending on which transmission path the driving force of the drive motor 350 is transmitted to the rotators 340a and 6340b.

  Here, means for switching the path for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 350 to the rotating bodies 340a and 6340b will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 59D and 59E, the engagement piece 6342bt arranged in the first state and the first wall surface 6355b1 of the power switching hole 6355b can be brought into contact with each other in the circumferential direction. Since the intermediate gears 354 and 2354 rotate together with the rotation of the first rotating body 340a, the rotation directions of the intermediate gears 354 and 2354 are the same. That is, in FIGS. 59D and 59E in which the states of the intermediate gears 354 and 2354 from the opposite side in the axial direction are illustrated, the rotation directions of the intermediate gears 354 and 2354 are opposite to each other.

  Therefore, when the intermediate gear 354 rotates clockwise in FIG. 59 (d) (the drive motor 350 rotates counterclockwise when viewed in the direction of FIG. 59 (a)), the intermediate gear 2354 is counterclockwise in FIG. 59 (e). Rotate clockwise. In this case, when the second gear 6355 rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gear 354 (see the first transmission path FL1, FIG. 59 (a)), the first wall surface 6355b1 swings the engagement piece 6342bt. It abuts on the engagement piece 6342bt in the circumferential direction in a manner of pressing against the end of the moving range (region of the character shape). Thereby, the rotation of the second gear 6355 is transmitted to the end face plate 6342, and the second rotating body 6340b rotates.

  On the other hand, when the second gear 6355 rotates clockwise in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gear 2354 (the drive motor 350 rotates counterclockwise as viewed in FIG. 59 (a)) (the second transmission path FL2, 59 (c)), the engaging piece 6342bt is pushed by the second wall surface 6355b2 and arranged in the second state, so that the engaging piece 6342bt, the first wall surface 6355b1, and the second wall surface 6355b2 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The sliding and rotation of the second gear 6355 is not transmitted to the end face plate 6342.

  Similarly, when the first rotating body 340 rotates in the opposite direction (the drive motor 350 rotates clockwise as viewed in FIG. 59 (a)) (in FIG. 59 (d), the intermediate gear 354 rotates counterclockwise. In addition, when the intermediate gear 2354 rotates clockwise in FIG. 59 (e), the second gear 6355 meshed with the intermediate gear 2354 transmits power to the end face plate 6342 (second transmission path FL2). 59c), the second gear 6355 meshed with the intermediate gear 354 does not transmit power to the end face plate 6342 (first transmission path FL1, see FIG. 59 (a)).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a gear including a one-way clutch (a so-called “sprag type” one-way clutch) is disposed at both ends of the second rotating body 6340b, so that the driving force of the driving motor 350 is transmitted to a pair of transmission paths. In either case, transmission to the end face plate 6342 is achieved.

  Although not described in this embodiment, a “cam type (roller type)” one-way clutch, which is a known technique, may be used. With the “cam type” one-way clutch, the driving force can be switched between the non-transmitting state and the non-transmitting state at any timing regardless of the phase difference between the inner ring and the outer ring. After the rotation, a time delay when rotating in the reverse direction (a time delay at the start of rotation of the inner ring with respect to the start of rotation of the outer ring) can be suppressed.

  Therefore, the production of the pair of rotating bodies 340a and 6340b can be complicated without increasing the number of the drive motors 350 provided.

  Here, as in this embodiment, when switching the driving force transmission in relation to the power switching unit 6342b2 depending on the direction in which the second gear 6355 is rotated, when the second gear 6355 is stopped by stopping the driving motor 350, There is a problem in that the power switching unit 6342b2 may continue to rotate due to the inertia of the rotation and may apply a load to the second gear 6355.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the driving motor 350 is stopped when the driving force is transmitted through the first transmission path FL1 shown in FIG. 59A (the second gear 6355 rotates counterclockwise). Then, the power switching unit 6342b tries to rotate counterclockwise in FIG. 59 (a) due to the inertia of rotation. In this case, on the side of FIG. 59 (c), since the power switching unit 6342b rotates clockwise, rotation is transmitted from the power switching unit 6342b to the second gear 6355 (at this time, the first rotating body 340a stops and stops). Since the intermediate gear 2354 is also stopped), the second gear 6355 may be loaded.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid 6330a is arrange | positioned along the axial direction of the 2nd rotary body 6340b. Since the electromagnetic solenoid 6330a is formed so as to protrude when the drive motor 350 stops (output is OFF), the electromagnetic solenoid 6330a brakes the second rotating body 6340b when the drive motor 350 stops. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the power switching unit 6342b from rotating due to inertia when the drive motor 350 is stopped, and to suppress the load on the second gear 6355.

  In the present embodiment, a drive motor 350 is disposed on the first transmission path FL1 (see FIG. 59 (a)) side, and the driving force is transmitted to the second transmission path FL2 (see FIG. 59 (c)). The first rotating body 340a is interposed. In other words, since the first rotating body 340a serves both as the effect member and the transmitting member that transmits the driving force, the transmitting member is disposed outside the rotation locus of the first rotating body 340a. In comparison with this, the space inside the container 6330 can be effectively utilized.

  Here, as a mode of transmitting the driving force to the pair of transmission paths arranged on the left and right, for example, a drive motor of both axes (a drive motor having a rotation axis arranged in both the left and right directions in FIG. 59B). It is also conceivable to arrange at the position of the drive motor 350. However, in this case, since the rotation shaft of the drive motor is disposed in the space to the right of the drive motor 350 in a front view (see FIG. 59B), another effect member (for example, a movable member or It is impossible to dispose a lighting device such as an LED. In addition, when it is necessary to arrange another production member in the right space of the drive motor 350 due to production or mechanism, a rotation shaft is arranged in the right space of the drive motor 350. I can't.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the area within the rotation locus of the first rotator 340a that is necessary for the production of the first rotator 340a is used as the second transmission path FL2, so that the right side of the drive motor 350 This space can be effectively utilized as a space for arranging other effect members (for example, lighting devices such as movable members and LEDs).

  In the present embodiment, the first transmission path FL1 and the second transmission path FL2 are configured at the left and right ends of the pair of rotating bodies 340a and 6340b. Therefore, the width required for the left and right outer sides of the pair of rotating bodies 340a and 6340b can be made uniform and the degree of freedom in design can be improved, and the pair of rotating bodies 340a and 6340b is a partition plate that partitions the transmission paths FL1 and FL2. Since it also serves as a role, it is possible to reduce the number of necessary members.

  With reference to FIG. 60, an example of the control of drive motor 350 (see FIG. 59B) will be described. FIG. 60A is a timing chart showing the output voltage of the sensor unit 6342c1 when the second gear 6355 rotates in a sliding direction with respect to the engagement piece 6342bt, and FIG. 60B to FIG. FIG. 60 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation state of the drive motor 350 in the state shown in FIG. 60A, and FIG. 60E shows the drive motor 350 stopped at the timing t2 shown in FIG. 60 (f) is a front view of the second gear 355 and the end face plate 6342 in the case, and FIG. 60 (f) is the second gear 355 and the end face plate 6342 when the drive motor 350 is stopped at the timing t3 shown in FIG. 60 (c). 60 (g) is a front view of the second gear 355 and the end face plate 6342 when the drive motor 350 is stopped at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 60 (d). .

  Here, for example, when the driving force of the driving motor 350 is transmitted through the first transmission path FL1 (see FIG. 59B) (when the driving motor 350 rotates clockwise in the direction of FIG. 59A). ), The left second gear 6355 (see FIG. 59 (a)) rotates in a sliding direction with respect to the engagement piece 6342bt of the end face plate 6342, so that the left second gear 6355 and the end face plate 6342 are idle. It becomes possible.

  At this time, if the right second gear 6355 (see FIG. 59 (c)) and the intermediate gear 2354 (see FIG. 59 (c)) mesh with each other, the left side of the transmission path FL2 due to driving force transmission. Rotation of the end face plate 6342 (see FIG. 59A) and rotation of the second gear due to transmission of the driving force of the transmission path FL1 occur at the same speed (in FIG. 59, above the first rotating body 340a). Since the gear ratio is the same), the phase relationship between the left end face plate 6342 and the left second gear 6355 does not change.

  On the other hand, when the second gear on the right side (see FIG. 59 (c)) and the intermediate gear 2354 (see FIG. 59 (c)) slide, the second rotating body by driving force transmission through the transmission path FL2. The rotation of 6340b stops. Therefore, a phase difference is generated between the left second gear 6355 (see FIG. 59A) that rotates by transmission of the transmission path FL1 and the engaging piece 6342bt disposed in the second rotating body 6340b that stops. (Second gear 6355 idles with respect to end face plate 6342).

  In FIG. 60A, the horizontal axis represents the phase difference between the second gear 6355 and the end face plate 6342 with reference to a predetermined posture. As described above, the second gear 6355 idles with respect to the end face plate 6342. In this case, the output voltage from the sensor unit 6342c is shown. As shown in FIG. 60A, at the timing when the output voltage from the sensor unit 6342c rises from the voltage V0 to the voltage V1, the detection unit 6355c comes close to the sensor unit 6342c1 (the detection unit 6355c is in the detection region of the sensor unit 6342c1). Begin to enter). In addition, when the output voltage from the sensor unit 6342c decreases from the voltage V1 to the voltage V0, the detection unit 6355c moves away from the sensor unit 6342c1 (the detection unit 6355c starts to come out of the detection region of the sensor unit 6342c1). In the present embodiment, since the detectors 6355c are arranged at intervals of 30 degrees in the circumferential direction of the second gear 6355, the interval between the rising portions of the voltage is such that the phase difference between the second gear 6355 and the end face plate 6342 is 30. Is equal to the time interval that occurs.

  Here, as described above, when the second gear 6355 rotates in the direction in which the engagement piece 6342bt slides with respect to the second gear 6355 (clockwise in FIG. 59 (e)), the detection unit 6355c In a phase relationship where 6342c1 starts to detect the detector 6355c, the side surface of the engagement piece 6342bt is arranged in a manner in which the side surface abuts against the first wall surface 6355b1 (see FIG. 60 (e)).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60B, when the rotation of the drive motor 350 is stopped at the timing t2 when the output voltage from the sensor unit 6342c1 rises, the engagement piece 6342bt is engaged with the first wall surface 6355b1 of the second gear 6355 on the left side. The second gear 6355 stops at the phase in which the side surfaces abut (see FIG. 60 (e)). Accordingly, when the drive motor 350 is rotated in the reverse direction (FIG. 59 (a) counterclockwise) from this state, the left second gear 6355 (see FIG. 59 (d)) is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor 350. The second rotating body 6340b rotates without delay.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60C, when the rotation of the drive motor is stopped at the timing t3 when the output voltage from the sensor unit 6342c1 decreases, the second gear 6355 on the left side from the state shown in FIG. 59 (d)) slightly rotates clockwise (5 to 15 degrees) and stops in a state where the engagement piece 6342bt is separated from the first wall surface 6355b1 (see FIG. 60F).

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 60D, when the rotation of the drive motor is stopped at a timing t1 between the timing when the output voltage from the sensor unit 6342c1 decreases and the timing when the output voltage rises, the second gear 6355 ( 59 (d)) rotates further clockwise than the state shown in FIG. 60 (f), and the engagement piece 6342bt stops in a state further away from the first wall surface 6355b1 (see FIG. 60 (g)). .

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (f) and 60 (g), when the second gear 6355 stops in a state where the engagement piece 6342bt is separated from the first wall surface 6355b1, the drive motor 350 (FIG. 59 ( a) (see FIG. 59 (a) counterclockwise), the engaging piece 6342bt is brought into contact with the first wall surface 6355b1 and the engaging piece 6342bt is brought into contact with the end face of the power switching portion 6342b2. Until the contact, the driving force is not transmitted from the second gear 6355 to the end face plate 6342. Therefore, the timing at which the intermediate gear 2354 and the second gear 6355 start to mesh with the start timing of the second rotating body 6340b is deviated (the rotation of the second rotating body 6352b is rattling), which may reduce the effect of presentation. was there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 350 is controlled to stop at the timing t2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the intermediate gear 2354 and the second gear 6355 start to mesh with the start timing of the second rotating body 6340b from shifting. In consideration of a transient response when the drive motor 350 decelerates, it is preferable to perform control in such a manner that the drive motor 350 is stopped slightly earlier than the timing t2.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the rotational force is transmitted to the pair of rotating bodies 340a and 6340b through the pair of transmission paths FL1 and FL2 has been described. However, the pair of rotating bodies 7340a and 7340b in the seventh embodiment is driven. Depending on the rotation direction of the motor 350, it is possible to switch between the rotating bodies 7340a and 7340b rotating or the fixed shaft 7341 rotating. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 61 is a front exploded perspective view of the first rotating body 7340a in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, the first rotating body 7340a is rotatably supported by a fixed shaft 7341 (in this embodiment, the fixed shaft 7341 is configured to be rotatable) and both ends of the fixed shaft 7341 in the axial direction. A pair of end face plates 342 and 7342 and three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B and third display board 343C) installed between the pair of end face plates 342 and 7342, and Of the pair of end face plates 342 and 7342, a second gear rotatably supported by a drive side end face plate 7342 disposed on the left side of the front view (the side where the drive motor 350 is disposed, see FIG. 62). 6355 and an engaging member 7345 rotatably supported by the fixed shaft 7341 are mainly provided.

  The fixed shaft 7341 includes a body portion 341b, a shaft portion 7341a provided continuously to the right end of the body portion 341b, and a columnar shape provided continuously from the body portion 341b on the opposite side of the shaft portion 7341a. The drive side shaft portion 7341c is mainly provided.

  The shaft portion 7341a is a cylindrical member whose outer shape of the axial straight section is circular, and is a portion that is rotatably held by the container 7330 (see FIG. 62). At this time, the holding hole 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side wall body 333 is processed into a circular shape, so that the shaft portion 7341a is rotatably held by the housing body 7330. Note that a biasing force acts on the shaft portion 7341a in a direction in which the LED 344 is maintained in a posture facing the front direction by biasing means such as a torsion spring CS1 (see FIG. 62) fixed to the housing 7330.

  The drive-side shaft portion 7341c is formed in a cylindrical shape having a smaller diameter than the shaft support hole 6342a of the drive-side end face plate 7342, and is cut out in a sector shape from the shaft center toward the radially outer side at a portion protruding from the shaft support portion 6342b. A notch 7341c1 and a pin support recess 7341c2 that is recessed from the end of the drive-side shaft 7341c on the rotation axis of the fixed shaft 7341 are mainly provided.

  The notch 7341c1 is a portion that partially accommodates the engaging member 7345. The notch 7341c1 is designed so that the axial width is slightly longer than the thickness of the engaging member 7345, and the opening width in the circumferential direction (sector-shaped). Forming angle) is larger than the fan-shaped forming angle of the main body portion 7345a of the engaging member 7345. That is, the engaging member 7345 can be moved in the circumferential direction inside the notch 7341c1.

  Pin support recessed part 7341c2 is comprised in the aspect connected with notch 7341c1 in an axial direction.

  The drive side end plate 7342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a cylindrical shaft support portion 6342b extending in the axial direction at the center portion, and a shaft support provided at the center of the shaft support portion 6342b. Hole 6342a.

  The shaft support portion 6342b is a columnar shaft support body 6342b1 extending outward in the axial direction from the plate portion, and extends outward from the shaft support body 6342b1 and is supported at an eccentric position and swings in the circumferential direction. And a power switching unit 6342b2 including the engagement piece 6342bt.

  The second gear 6355 is a gear member that transmits the driving force of the driving motor 350 (see FIG. 62) to the first rotating body 7340a, and has an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the shaft main body 6342b along the thickness direction at the center. A recessed portion 6355a that is recessed from the side facing the driving side end face plate 7342, and an outer side from the end opposite to the driving side end face plate 7342 of the recessed portion 6355a (the opposite side of the driving side end face plate 7342) ) And a power switching hole 6355b drilled toward the head. With such a configuration, the second gear 6355 includes an opening in which the recessed portion 6355a and the power switching hole 6355b are continuously provided.

  The configuration of the shaft support portion 6342b and the second gear 6355 is the same as the configuration of the shaft support portion 6342b and the second gear 6355 in the sixth embodiment except that the length in the axial direction is shortened. Is omitted.

  Regarding the operation of the shaft support portion 6342b and the second gear 6355, the driving force of the drive motor 350 is transmitted to the shaft support portion 6342b according to the rotation direction of the second gear 6355, as in the sixth embodiment, and non-transmission. The case where it is done is switched.

  The engaging member 7345 has a main body portion 7345a formed in a fan-shaped plate shape, a through hole 7345b formed in a circular cross section in the thickness direction near the apex of the main body portion 7345a, and a diameter from an outer peripheral portion of the main body portion 7345a. It mainly includes an extending portion 7345c extending outward in the direction and a shaft support pin 7345d that is a columnar member that is inserted through the through hole 7345b and the pin support recess 7341c2.

  The main body portion 7345a has a notch 7341c1 on the outer side in the axial direction of the second gear 6355 so that the top side (the side where the through hole 7345b is disposed) is accommodated, and the through hole 7345b and the pin support recess 7341c2 are aligned in a straight line. Be placed. In this arrangement, the shaft support pin 7345d is inserted into the through hole 7345b and the pin support recess 7341c2, so that the engagement member 7345 can rotate (swing) around the rotation axis of the fixed shaft 7341.

  With reference to FIG. 62, the role of the engaging member 7345 will be described. 62A is a side view of the container 7330 viewed from the side from the engagement member 7345 side, and FIG. 62B is a front view of the container 7330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62A. is there. 62A and 62B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed, and in FIG. 62B, the vicinity of the engaging member 7345 is partially shown. In cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, a transmission gear 7352 is interposed between the drive gear 351 and the first rotating body 7340a, and an intermediate gear 7354 is interposed between the first rotating body 7340a and the second rotating body 7340b. It is installed.

  The transmission gear 7352 and the intermediate gear 7354 include protrusions 7352a and 7354a that protrude outward along the axial direction at eccentric positions. The convex portions 7352a and 7354a can be brought into contact with the extending portion 7345c of the engaging member 7345 of the rotating body adjacent on the upper side in the circumferential direction. The second gear 6355 and the first gear 7352, which is common except that the outer diameter of the second gear 6355 is different from each other, are counterclockwise in a side view (FIG. 62) due to the shape of the power switching hole 6355b. (A) When rotating counterclockwise (when the transmission gear 7352 and the intermediate gear 7354 rotate clockwise when viewed from the side), the driving force is transmitted to the shaft support 6342b and the driving side end plate 7342.

  In other words, when the second gear 6355 and the first gear 7352 rotate clockwise in a side view (when the transmission gear 7352 and the intermediate gear 7354 rotate counterclockwise in a side view), the shaft support portion 6342b and the driving side end are rotated. The driving force is not transmitted to the face plate 7342, and the pair of rotating bodies 7340a and 7340b are stopped.

  In FIG. 63, the rotation of the fixed shaft 7341 is illustrated along the time series. 63 (a), 63 (c), 63 (e), and 63 (g) show the first rotating body 7340a and the transmission gear 7352 viewed along the axial direction from the drive side end face plate 7342 side. 63B is a front view of the first rotating body 7340a and the transmission gear 7352 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIIb in FIG. 63A, and FIG. 63D is FIG. 63C. FIG. 63F is a front view of the first rotating body 7340a and the transmission gear 7352 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIIId, and FIG. 63F is a front view of the first rotating body 7340a and the transmission gear 7352 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIIIf of FIG. FIG. 63 (h) is a front view of the first rotating body 7340a and the transmission gear 7352 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIIIh in FIG. 63 (g).

  63 (a) and 63 (b) illustrate a state in which the convex portion 7352a is separated from the extending portion 7345c. In FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d), FIG. 63 (a) is illustrated. 63B, the state where the transmission gear 7352 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise, the convex portion 7352a is brought into contact with the extending portion 7345c, and the predetermined amount extending portion 7345c is moved, is illustrated in FIG. 63 (e) and FIG. 63 (f), a state immediately before the transmission gear 7352 is rotated a predetermined amount counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (c) and FIG. 63 (d) and the convex portion 7352a is separated from the extending portion 7345c. 63 (g) and 63 (h), the transmission gear 7352 is rotated a predetermined amount counterclockwise from the state of FIGS. 63 (e) and 63 (f), and the convex portion 7352a is the extended portion. By moving away from 7345c, the fixed shaft 734 State in which the attitude of has been restored by the urging force is illustrated.

  Further, in FIGS. 63A, 63C, 63E, and 63G, the illustration outside the notch 7341c1 of the drive side shaft portion 7341c is omitted, and the notch 7341c is a solid line. And the illustration of the first gear 7353 is partially omitted.

  In FIG. 63 (a), the engaging member 7345 is in a posture in which the center of gravity is disposed below the shaft support pin 7345d due to gravity, and in this posture, the back side of the engaging member 7345 (left side in FIG. 63 (a)). The notch 7341c1 is formed in such a manner that one side surface of the notch 7341c1 contacts the side surface of the notch 7341c1. Therefore, the side surface on the front side (right side in FIG. 63 (a)) of the engaging member 7345 and the other side surface of the notch 7341c1 are separated from each other.

  When the transmission gear 7352 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63A, the driving force is transmitted from the first gear 7353 to the shaft support portion 6342b, and the first rotating body 7340a rotates. At this time, as indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. 63A, even if the convex portion 7352a pushes the extended portion 7345c of the engaging member 7345, the posture change of the engaging member 7345 is within the range of the notch 7341c1. Therefore, the fixed shaft 7341 maintains the posture shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the transmission gear 7352 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 63A, the driving force is not transmitted from the first gear 7353 to the shaft support portion 6342b, and the first rotating body 7340a does not rotate. Therefore, the display of the 1st rotary body 7340a visually recognized by a player is not changed, and there exists a possibility that a presentation effect may fall.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the transmission gear 7352 is rotated counterclockwise, the convex portion 7352a abuts on the engaging member 7345, and the engaging member 7345 presses the side surface of the notch 7341c1, thereby driving side The shaft portion 7341c rotates (see FIGS. 63A, 63C, and 63E). Therefore, since the fixed shaft 7341 rotates, the light emitting state of the first rotating body 7340a visually recognized by the player changes when the direction of the LED 344 changes. Thereby, the improvement of a production effect can be aimed at.

  The fixed shaft 7341 is biased by a biasing means (not shown) so as to maintain the state of FIG. 63 (a), so that the state of FIG. 63 (e) is changed to the state of FIG. Since the load from 7352a to the extending portion 7345c is eliminated, the fixed shaft 7341 returns to the state shown in FIG. 63 (h).

  That is, while the driving force is transmitted to the fixed shaft 7341 in one direction, the operation of the fixed shaft 7341 is not limited to the one rotating in one direction, and the LED 344 is reciprocated in a front view as in this embodiment. The fixed shaft 7341 can also be operated (reciprocally oscillated) in a manner.

  Thus, by changing the rotation direction of one drive motor 350, different rendering members such as the first rotating body 7340a and the fixed shaft 7341 can be independently driven, and the direction of the driving force called reciprocation operation. By causing the fixed shaft 7341 to perform the operation of reversing the rotation, it is possible to produce an effect as if a pair of drive devices are necessary. Therefore, the effect of the first rotating body 7340a can be improved (the effect is complicated) without increasing the number of the drive motors 350 provided.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the rotational force is transmitted to the pair of rotating bodies 340a and 6340b through the pair of transmission paths FL1 and FL2 has been described, but the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b in the eighth embodiment is driven. Depending on the rotation direction of the motor 350, it is possible to switch between the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b rotating and the shielding device 8380 operating. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the container 8330 and the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, in the container 8330, the upper portions of the side wall bodies 8332 and 8333 and the partition wall body 8334 are projected forward, and the upper portion of the decorative body 8335 is bent forward to form the shielding device 8380. A space that pivots is configured.

  The side wall 8333 is wound with the shaft of the shielding member 8380 inserted therethrough and generates a biasing force of rotation in one direction with respect to the shaft of the shielding member 8380 (in this embodiment, the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side in FIG. 64). A take-off device 8333b is provided.

  The partition wall 8334 includes a guide groove 8334b that is a recess that is offset by a predetermined amount rearward from the front-side end face and extends in the vertical direction. A recess having a shape facing the guide groove 8334b is also formed on the inner side surface of the side wall body 8333. The cylindrical member 8383 of the shielding member 8380 slides inside the guide groove 8334b and moves in the vertical direction. Thereby, it can prevent that the shielding member 8380 mentioned later interferes with rotation of a pair of rotary body 8340a, 8340b.

  The decorative body 8335 includes an L-shaped hook-shaped locking device 8335b on the back side near the lower end of the opening 335a. The locking device 8335b can be switched between a locked state (see FIG. 66 (d)) and a released state (see FIG. 67 (b)) by a notch mechanism.

  The shielding device 8380 is a device that changes the area of the flat surface portion of the cloth by expanding or winding the cloth member wound around the shaft, and the cylindrical rotating shaft 8381 and the winding shaft 8381 are wound around the rotating shaft 8381. Cloth member 8382 and a guide groove 8334b provided at one end portion of the cloth member 8382 in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the rotation shaft 8381 and having both end portions disposed on the side wall body 8333 and the partition wall body 8334. And a switching gear 8384, which is configured as a one-way clutch between the rotary shaft 8381 and switches the presence or absence of transmission of the driving force depending on the rotation direction.

  The rotation shaft 8381 is configured to expand the cloth member 8382 by rotating in the forward rotation direction (by rotating clockwise in FIG. 65 (a)). The rotating shaft 8381 is inserted into the winding device 8333b and is urged in the backward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 65 (a)).

  In the present embodiment, in the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b, the shaft portion on the right side when viewed from the front is the shaft portion 341 of the first embodiment, and the shaft portion on the left side is the shaft portion 6341a of the sixth embodiment. Accordingly, the end face plate 342 of the first embodiment is disposed on the right side when viewed from the front, the end face plate 6342 of the sixth embodiment is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front, and the left side when viewed from the front. Is provided with the second gear 6355 of the sixth embodiment (and the first gear 8353 formed in the same manner as the second gear 6355 except for the outer shape of the gear). That is, depending on the rotation direction of the drive motor 350, the case where the rotational driving force is transmitted from the second gear 6355 to the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b and the case where the rotational driving force is not transmitted are switched.

  65A is a side view of the container 8330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 64, and FIG. 65B is a front view of the container 8330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVb in FIG. . 65A and 65B show a state where the side wall body 8332 and the partition wall body 8334 are removed, and the decorative body 8335 is partially omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), an intermediate gear 8356 is disposed between the second gear 6355 and the switching gear 8384 of the shielding device 8380 so as to be pivotally supported by the partition wall 8334.

  In the present embodiment, the one-way clutch gear described in the sixth embodiment is disposed in the first gear 8353, the second gear 6355, and the switching gear 8384, and the direction in which power is transmitted is the first gear 8353 and the second gear 6355. And the switching gear 8384 in the opposite direction.

  More specifically, when the drive gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 65A (hereinafter, referred to as “positive direction” in the present embodiment), the first gear 8353 and the second gear 6355 rotate the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b. On the other hand, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotary shaft 8381 from the switching gear 8384. On the other hand, when the drive gear 351 rotates clockwise in FIG. 65A (hereinafter referred to as “reverse direction” in this embodiment), the first gear 8353 and the second gear 6355 move to the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b. While the driving force is not transmitted, the switching gear 8384 transmits the driving force to the rotating shaft 8381 (the cloth member 8382 is extended).

  Accordingly, it is possible to switch between rotating the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b and operating the shielding device 8380 depending on the rotation direction of the drive motor 350. Thereby, for example, the shielding device 8380 is fixed in an extended state (see FIG. 66 (d)), and the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are rotated (moving the rotating table) while the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are not visible from the player. ). In this state, a desired stop state can be formed by slightly rotating the remaining portion, and then the cloth member 8382 is wound up, so that the rotation period of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b to be visually recognized by the player can be shortened. It is difficult for a person to predict where the rotary bodies 8340a and 8340b are rotating on the rotary table.

  Fixing the cloth member 8382 in a stretched state is achieved by the locking device 8335b locking the columnar member 8383. The mechanism will be described.

  With reference to FIG. 66 and FIG. 67, a mechanism in which the locking device 8335b locks the shielding device 8380 will be described. 66 (a) to 66 (d), 67 (a) and 67 (b) are side views of the shielding device 8380 and the locking device 8335b illustrating the operation of the shielding device 8380 in time series. In addition, illustration of the area | region between the shielding apparatus 8380 and the locking device 8335b is abbreviate | omitted for convenience of drawing arrangement | positioning.

  FIG. 66A shows a state in which the cloth member 8382 is wound up to the end, and the cylindrical member 8383 is disposed at the upper end of the guide groove 8334b (see FIG. 64). When the drive gear 351 (see FIG. 65A) is rotated in the reverse direction from this state, the cloth member 8382 spreads and the column member 8383 descends due to gravity, so that the column member 8383 contacts the locking device 8335b. (See FIG. 66 (b)).

  The locking device 8335b has a locked state (see FIG. 66 (c)) in which the cylindrical member 8383 is locked from the upper side by an inherent notch mechanism, and a released state in which it is retracted to the outside of the guide groove 8334b (see FIG. 64). 66 (b)) can be switched.

  When the drive gear 351 (see FIG. 65 (a)) is further rotated in the reverse direction from the state shown in FIG. 66 (a), the cylindrical member 8383 pushes the locking device 8335b. As a result, the notch mechanism is pushed down by one step, and the locking device 8335b changes to the locked state (see FIG. 66 (c)). When the power transmission of the drive motor 350 is released in this state, the rotary shaft 8281 is rotated by the winding device 8333b (see FIG. 64), and the cloth member 8382 is wound up, but the columnar member 8383 is engaged with the locking device 8335b. The cloth member 8382 is maintained in the state of FIG. 66 (d) by being stopped.

  From here, the drive gear 351 (see FIG. 65A) is rotated in the opposite direction again, whereby the columnar member 8383 is lowered and the locking device 8335b is pushed forward. As a result, the notch mechanism is pushed down by one step (see FIG. 67A), and the locking device 8335b is released, so that the cloth member 8382 can be wound up (see FIG. 67B).

  Thus, even when the driving force transmission to the shielding device 8380 is limited only to the reverse rotation of the driving gear 351 (see FIG. 65A), the shielding device 8380 is reciprocated (the cloth member 8382 is expanded). Or a winding operation). Therefore, it is possible to drive the shielding device 8380 and the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b (see FIG. 65A) separately while suppressing the number of drive motors 350 (see FIG. 65A). .

  67B, when the cloth member 8382 is wound by the urging force of the winding device 8333b (see FIG. 65A), the rotation of the rotating shaft 8381 (see FIG. 65A) is changed over to the switching gear. 8384 (see FIG. 65 (a)) (the switching gear 8384 is rotated counterclockwise), and accordingly, the first gear 8353 and the second gear 6355 (see FIG. 65 (a)) are rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, the rotation is transmitted to the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b (see FIG. 65 (a)). Therefore, while the cloth member 8382 is being wound, the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b continue to rotate.

  Therefore, before starting to wind up the cloth member 8382, the number of rotations of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b (see FIG. 65 (a)) until the winding of the cloth member 8382 is completed is calculated in advance (rotated clockwise). ) The rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are stopped in the posture (position of the rotary table), the locking member 8355b is released from the rotating body 8340b, and the cloth member 8382 is wound up, so that the cloth member 8382 is wound up and rotated simultaneously. The bodies 8340a and 8340b can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect of matching the operation end of the shielding device 8380 (completion of winding of the cloth member 8382) with the operation end of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b (fixing at the stop position). The effect of 8340a and 8340b can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the member including the columnar member 8383 at the tip is made of cloth, but is not limited thereto. For example, a plurality of plates may be connected in a sliding movement direction, and may be configured to be connected in a beaded manner. In this case, when the locking member 8335b is pushed down by the columnar member 8383, a driving force is transmitted from the rotary shaft 8381 to the columnar member 8383 by a hard member such as a plurality of plates, so the drive motor 350 (see FIG. 65 (a)). The locking device 8335b can be pushed down by this driving force.

  Therefore, a light member can be used as the cylindrical member 8383, and the load applied to the winding device 8333b and the cloth member 8382 can be reduced. Thereby, the winding device 8333b can be configured by a small device with a small generated force.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the drive motor 350 operates the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b and the shielding device 8380 separately has been described. It is possible to switch whether the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b rotate or the rotating plate device 9380 operates. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 68 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 9330 and the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b according to the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68, in the container 9330, the side walls 9332 and 9333 and the partition wall 9334 are projected to the back side as compared with the first embodiment, and the base 9331 is bent rearward, whereby the rotating plate A space for supporting and accommodating the device 9380 is formed. In the present embodiment, the reflecting portion RF of the base 9331 is removed, and an opening 9331a having the same size as the reflecting portion RF is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the side walls 9332 and 9333 are provided with shaft support holes 9332b and 9333b for supporting the respective rotary plates of the rotary plate device 9380, and the partition body 9334 is slid on the rotary shaft of each rotary plate member 9381. A slide groove 9334b is provided.

  The rotary plate device 9380 has a rotary shaft extending along the left and right sides, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) rotary plate members 9181 arranged in parallel up and down, and is pivotally supported by the partition wall 9334 and a pair of A power switching portion 9383 configured by an intermediate gear 9382 that is meshed with the rotating plate member 9381 and transmits rotation, a switching gear 9383a having the same outer shape as the intermediate gear 9382, and an interlocking gear 9383b that meshes with the second gear 6355. And mainly.

  The power switching unit 9383 is a device that is pivotally supported by the partition wall body 9334 and switches whether the power is transmitted to the switching gear 9383a or not transmitted according to the rotation direction of the interlocking gear 9383b. The one-way clutch mechanism described is used.

  The rotating plate member 9381 includes a shaft portion 9381a extending in the left-right direction, a rectangular plate-shaped plate portion 9381b extending in a radial direction on a surface passing through the central axis of the shaft portion 9381a, and a shaft portion 9381a. And a rotary gear-shaped gear portion 9381c disposed at one end portion.

  The plate portion 9381b has a pattern drawn on the surface, and the surface on which the pattern is drawn faces the player, whereby the player can visually recognize the pattern.

  In the assembled state, the gear portion 9381c of the upper pair of rotating plate members 9381 is meshed with the switching gear 9383a, and the gear portion 9381c of the lower pair of rotating plate members 9381 is meshed with the intermediate gear 9382.

  69A is a side view of the container 9330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIXa in FIG. 68, and FIG. 69B is a rear view of the container 9330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIXb in FIG. 69A. . 69A and 69B show a state in which the side wall body 9332, the partition wall body 9334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b), the rotary plate device 9380 is disposed at a position where the rotary plate member 9382 is offset by a predetermined amount from the rear of the rotary shaft of the rotary bodies 8340a and 8340b. The

  Here, when the rotary plate member 9381 is disposed behind the rotary shafts of the rotary bodies 8340a and 8340b, the rotary body is between the player and the player even if the plate portion 9381b is in a posture facing the player. Since 8340a and 8340b are interposed, the player cannot visually recognize the symbol drawn on the surface of the plate portion 9381b.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating plate member 9381 is not arranged behind the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b, thereby securing the arrangement area of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b and reducing the member cost. On the other hand, the rotating plate member 9381 is disposed at a position offset by a predetermined amount from the rear of the rotating shaft of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the pattern drawn on the plate portion 9371b. An effect can be secured.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the plate portion 9381b of the rotating plate member 9381 at the upper and lower ends is in a posture (hereinafter referred to as “shielded state”, see FIG. 69 (a)) with the surface facing the player. The upper and lower ends of the opening 9381a are shielded from the line of sight of the player who views the container 9330 in front view. In addition, the plate portion 9381b of the rotating plate member 9381 disposed in the middle (disposed in the region between the rotating shafts of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b) has a posture in which the surface is directed toward the player (hereinafter referred to as the player). In FIG. 69 (a), which is referred to as a “shielded state”), the plate portion 9381b is disposed in such a manner that it is aligned vertically. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the plate portion 9381b of the rotary plate member 9381 is formed with a width equal to or larger than the width in the left-right direction of the opening 9381a.

  Thereby, in the shielding state in which the surface of the plate portion 9381b is directed to the player (see FIG. 69A), the rotating plate member 9381 shields the opening 9381a, so that the player cannot visually recognize the rear of the opening 9381a. Become.

  Accordingly, the shielded state in which the surface of the rotating plate member 9381 is directed toward the player, and the state in which the surface of the rotating plate member 9381 is rotated 90 degrees from that state, and the end portion of the plate portion 9381b is directed toward the player (hereinafter referred to as “viewing”). The state visually recognized by the player can be greatly changed.

  A description will be given of how the drive motor 350 drives the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b and the rotating plate member 9381 separately by the gear transmission mechanism shown in FIG. The drive motor 350 is counterclockwise in FIG. 69A (hereinafter referred to as “forward direction” in the present embodiment) and clockwise in FIG. 69A (hereinafter referred to as “reverse direction” in the present embodiment). ) And a motor configured to be rotatable in both directions.

  From the configuration of the one-way clutch mechanism of the first gear 8353 and the second gear 6355 shown in FIG. 69 (a), the rotational driving force is transmitted to the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b when the driving gear 351 rotates in the forward direction. On the other hand, when the drive gear 351 rotates in the reverse direction, the rotational driving force is not transmitted to the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b. Here, since one gear is interposed between the drive gear 351, the first gear 8353, and the second gear 6355, the rotation direction of the drive gear 351 and the rotation direction of the first gear 8353 and the second gear 6355 are the same. (For example, when the drive gear 351 rotates in the positive direction, the first gear 8353 and the second gear 6355 also rotate in the positive direction). That is, since the rotation direction of the drive gear 351 can be equated with the rotation direction of the second gear 6355, in FIG. 70, the rotation direction of the second gear 6355 is described as the rotation direction of the drive gear 351 for simplicity.

  70A is a partially enlarged side view of the container 9330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIXa in FIG. 68, and FIG. 70B is a partial cross section of the container 9330 along the line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. FIG. 70 (a) and B12 (b) show a state in which the side wall body 9332, the partition wall body 9334, and the decorative body 335 are removed, and in FIG. 70 (a), the player moves the rotary plate device 9380. A shielded state in which the rear side is not visible is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the power switching unit 9383, the switching gear 9383a and the interlocking gear 9383b are formed separately, and a circular saw-shaped tooth profile is disposed on the switching gear 9383a, and the tooth profile is An engagement piece capable of contacting in the circumferential direction is provided in the interlocking gear 9383b.

  When the second gear 6355 rotates in the forward direction (the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b rotate in this state) by the thus formed one-way clutch mechanism, the interlocking gear 9383b rotates in the reverse direction, thereby causing the interlocking gear 9383b. Is not transmitted to the switching gear 9383a (the interlocking gear 9383b rotates in a direction in which the engagement piece slides with respect to the circular saw-tooth shape).

  On the other hand, when the second gear 6355 rotates in the opposite direction (rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b stop in this state), the interlocking gear 9383b rotates in the forward direction, so that the driving force is transmitted from the interlocking gear 9383b to the switching gear 9383a. The interlocking gear 9383b rotates in a direction in which the engagement piece bites in the circumferential direction with respect to the tooth shape of the circular saw shape. As a result, when the switching gear 9383a rotates, the four rotating plate members 9381 arranged vertically are rotated at the same speed by the gear meshing shown in FIG. 69A (the direction is the upper pair). The rotating plate member 9381 is the same, and the pair of lower rotating plate members 9381 has the rotating direction reversed with respect to the upper pair of rotating plate members 9381).

  That is, according to the rotation direction of the drive motor 350, the rotating plate device 9380 can be operated with the rotating members 8340a and 8340b stopped, and the rotating members 8340a and 8340b are rotated with the rotating plate device 9380 stopped. be able to. Therefore, a plurality of members can be operated separately while suppressing the number of drive motors 350 provided.

  71 is a side view of the container 9330 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIXa in FIG. 71 shows a state in which the side wall body 9332, the partition wall body 9334, and the decorative body 335 are removed, and a visual recognition state in which the player can visually recognize the back of the rotary plate device 9380 is illustrated.

  In the state shown in FIG. 71, the player can visually recognize the rear of the opening 9331a. As shown in FIG. 71, the shaft portion 9381a of the rotating plate member 9381 is disposed at a position where it is hidden by the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b (a range in which the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b project in front view). Thereby, when the rotating plate device 9380 is in a visually recognizable state, the rotating plate member 9381 can be retracted to the rear of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b, and an area where the opening 9331a can be visually recognized can be ensured to the maximum.

  Here, for example, when the rotary plate member 9380 of the rotary plate device 9380 is in a visible state (see FIG. 71), when the container 9330 moves up and down, the rotary plate member 9381 may rotate with that momentum. In that case, the postures of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b engaged with the rotating plate member 9381 may be shifted.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the gear ratio of the second gear 6355 to the gear portion 9381c of the rotating plate member 9381 is about 2 (12 gear teeth of the gear portion 9381b: 20 gear teeth of the second gear 6355). ). Therefore, even if the rotary plate member 9381 is deviated by a predetermined angle, the posture deviation of the first rotating body 8340a can be suppressed to about half of the angle, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be suppressed. Note that the gear ratio is not limited to 2, and as the gear ratio increases, the first rotating body 8340a is displaced in a state in which the angle of the posture change of the rotating plate member 9381 is further suppressed.

  72 (a) and 72 (b) are partial front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 72A, the rotating plate device 9380 is in a visible state (see FIG. 71), and in FIG. 72B, the rotating plate device 9380 is in a shielding state (see FIG. 69A).

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the rotating plate device 9380 changes the posture in a state where the container 9330 is disposed in front of the opening 211a, so that the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b The visible symbols can be changed in the surrounding gaps.

  That is, in the state of FIG. 72 (b), the symbol drawn on the surface of the plate portion 9381b is visible, while in the state of FIG. 72 (a), the opening 9331a passes through the inside of the rear opening 211a. The display of the arranged third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible. Thereby, a change can be given to the production of the rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 84. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the rotating shafts of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged in parallel with each other in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 has been described. The axes are arranged perpendicular to each other. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 73 is a front exploded perspective view of the central unit 10300C in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, the central unit 10300C is disposed in a posture in which the vertical axis rotating body 10340 vertically intersects the rotating axis below the second rotating body 340b.

  In addition, the connecting member 325 has an arc shape that is recessed toward the back side at the place where the housing 330 is provided (the front side of the end of the connecting member 325 opposite to the end where the rack gear 324 is provided). And a shaft support plate member 10326 that extends toward the front side below the arc plate member 10370. Details of the arc plate member 10370 and its function will be described later.

  The shaft support plate member 10326 has a shape that is engaged with a rack support 1031RF2 (see FIG. 76) centering on the shaft support hole 10326a that is formed in a circular shape in the vertical direction at the front end thereof. The fixed gear portion 10326b formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 10326a.

  The container 330 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 10326a. The container 330 rotates around the shaft support hole 10326a as a rotation axis, so that the rotation of the vertical rotor 10340 can be performed through a rectangular window 10333b that is formed in a rectangular shape in the center of the side wall 10333 of the container 330. The player can visually recognize the form and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340.

  The fixed gear portion 10326b is fixed to the shaft support plate member 10326. Accordingly, as described later, the reflecting member 10331RF is formed to be slidable by moving the rack gear portion 10331RF2 (see FIG. 74) meshed with the fixed gear portion 10326b as the container 10330 rotates. (See FIGS. 81 to 83).

  The fixed gear portion 10326b is formed in a portion (a part of the outer peripheral surface with the shaft support hole 10326a as the center) hidden behind the shaft support plate member 10326 in a front view. Thereby, it can suppress that the external appearance of the container 10330 in a front view is deteriorated.

  FIG. 74 is a rear exploded perspective view of the central unit 10300C. As shown in FIG. 74, on the back side of the base body 10331, the rotation shaft is supported in a guideable manner by a drive motor 10336 and an arc plate member 10370 that are formed in parallel with the drilling direction of the shaft support hole 10326a (see FIG. 77 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 76, a guide extending portion 10331e extending to the back side is formed.

  The guide extension portion 10331e is formed in a bowl shape with the tip projecting downward, and the tip is inserted into the guide hole portion 10373 (see FIG. 77) of the arcuate plate member 10370, thereby guiding the rotation of the container 330. It exhibits the action and the action of suppressing the parallel movement (movement in the paper surface direction of FIG. 77) and the axis collapse movement of the container 330. Details thereof will be described later.

  FIG. 75 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 10330. As shown in FIG. 75, the container 10330 includes a base body 10331, left and right side wall bodies 10332 and 10333 disposed on the left and right sides of the base body 10331, and a partition wall body disposed on the inner surface side of the left side wall body 332. 10334 and a decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base body 10331, and these portions 10331 to 10334 and 335 are integrated by fastening to form a box shape.

  The base body 10331 is a member that forms the back surface (the back side in FIG. 75), the top surface, and the bottom surface (upper side and lower side in FIG. 75) of the container 10330, and is integrally formed by combining three plate-like members. . In addition, the base body 10331 is disposed so as to face the upper surface of the container 10330 and extends from the rear surface toward the front side, and the lower side disposed below the upper intermediate plate 10331a with a predetermined interval. An intermediate plate 10331b, a lower bottom plate 10331c which is a plate member disposed opposite to the lower intermediate plate 10331b and which forms the lower surface of the base body 10331, and a circular cross-section in a manner of being pushed downward at a substantially central portion of the lower base plate 10331c. A recessed portion 10331d and a guide extending portion 10331e (see FIG. 74) are mainly formed.

  In the portion forming the back surface of the container 10330, a reflection portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front surface between the upper surface of the container and the upper intermediate plate 10331a, and is movable. The reflecting member 10331RF is disposed in front of the upper intermediate plate 10331a and the lower intermediate plate 10331b.

  As a result, since the reflection part RF and the reflection member 10331RF are separated by the upper intermediate plate 10331a, the light emitted from the vertical axis rotating body 10341 and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface are reflected by the reflecting member 10331RF, and the second rotating body The light emitted from 340b and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface can be reflected by the reflecting portion RF. Therefore, since it can suppress that each light mixes, for example, when the color of the light emitted from the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is different from the color of the light emitted from the second rotating body 340b In addition, it is possible to suppress the mixing of the colors of the visually recognized light, and it is possible to make the light effect of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the light effect of the second rotating body 340b visible independently. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exert the effect of the light emitted from each rotating body and the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface.

  Further, an extending portion 10331RF1 (see FIGS. 74 and 81) extending from the reflecting member 10331RF to the back side is projected to the back side of the base 10331 through a through hole formed in the back of the base 10331, and the base It hangs down below 10331.

  The extension portion 10331RF1 (see FIGS. 74 and 81) is arranged below the lower end portion of the housing body 10330 on the back side of the housing body 10330 and has a rack gear portion 10331RF2 (see FIG. 77) formed with parallel gear teeth. Connected and fixed.

  The recessed portion 10331d is a portion that rotatably supports the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and is inserted through the shaft supporting hole 10326a (see FIG. 73).

  In the side wall body 10332, only the upper holding hole 332a is formed, and the lower holding hole 332a (see FIG. 17) is omitted.

  The side wall body 10333 includes a rectangular window 10333b that is formed in a rectangular shape at a location facing the vertical axis rotating body 10340.

  In the partition body 10334, only the upper insertion hole 334a is formed, and the lower insertion hole (see FIG. 17) is omitted. Further, a first gear 10353 is provided which is pivotally supported between a transmission gear 352 and an intermediate gear 354 which are pivotally supported between the opposing surfaces of the side wall body 10332 and which transmits a driving force by meshing. In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the first gear 10353 is formed separately from each rotating body.

  The container 10330 thus formed includes a drive motor 350 disposed on the partition wall 10334, a vertical axis rotary body 10340 and a second rotary body 340 b that are rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 350, and a drive A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 350 to the vertical rotation body 10340 and the second rotation body 340b and a detection mechanism that detects the rotational position of the vertical rotation body 10340 are mainly housed.

  The transmission mechanism in the housing 10330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352, a first gear 10353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 that are sequentially engaged with the drive gear 351. And a gear train composed of a first bevel gear 10356 and a second bevel gear 10357 that are sequentially engaged in the opposite direction of the gear train.

  The transmission gear 352, the first gear 10353, the intermediate gear 354, and the first bevel gear 10356 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the second gear 355 is supported by the second rotating body 340b. The second bevel gear 10357 is fixed to the end surface in the axial direction, and is pivotally supported by the lower bottom plate 10331c.

  The first bevel gear 10356 includes a spur gear portion 10356a formed in a spur gear shape, and a bevel gear portion formed in a bevel gear shape disposed on the tip side (right side in FIG. 75) of the spur gear portion 10356a. 10356b.

  The spur gear portion 10356a is meshed with the drive gear 351, and the bevel gear portion 10356b is meshed with a second bevel gear 10357 whose rotation axes intersect perpendicularly. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 350 is transmitted to the second bevel gear 10357 by changing the transmission direction by 90 degrees.

  In this way, the driving force is changed by 90 degrees and transmitted to the second gear 10357, whereby the vertical axis rotating body 10340 supported by the rotating shaft parallel to the second bevel gear 10357 and the second rotating body 340b are connected. It can be rotated by a single drive motor 350.

  The vertical axis rotating body 10340 is a gear shape in which a driving force is transmitted from the second bevel gear 10357 via an intermediate gear near the lower end of the rotating shaft 10341 and a rotating shaft 10341 extending in a columnar shape in the vertical direction. The gear portion 10342 formed on the rotating shaft 10341 and a triangular prism formed of a light-transmitting material near the upper end of the rotating shaft 10341. The rotating shaft 10341 rotates around the rotating shaft 10341 as the rotating shaft 10341 rotates. The display unit 10343 is mainly provided.

  In the display unit 10343, the transmissive part PN and the reflective part are arranged on each surface in the same manner as the second rotating body 340b. In addition, a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided inside the display portion 10343, and the inner surface of the display portion 10343 can be irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs.

  Since the tip of the rotating shaft 10341 on the side of the gear portion 10342 is formed so as to be retractable, the tip of the rotating shaft 10341 on the display portion 10343 side is first attached when the vertical axis rotating member 10340 is assembled to the housing 10330. Is inserted into the shaft support hole 10331a3 of the upper intermediate plate 10331a, pressed against the upper surface of the lower bottom plate 10331c of the base 331 while the tip of the rotating shaft 10341 on the gear portion 10342 side is immersed, and is positioned at the recessed portion 10331d. The rotating shaft 10341 can be pivotally supported on the base body 10330 by projecting the tip of the gear portion 10342 on the side of the gear 10341.

  The rotation mechanism of the container 10330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. 76 is a top view of the container 10330 and the arc plate member 10370, FIG. 77 (a) is a top view of the container 10330 and the arc plate member 10370, and FIG. 77 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 77 (a). ) Is a cross-sectional view of the container 10330 and the arc plate member 10370 along the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb. 76 shows a state in which the opening 335a faces the front side (lower side in FIG. 76), and FIG. 77 shows a state in which the rectangular window portion 10333b faces the front side (lower side in FIG. 77 (a)). Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the arc plate member 10370 includes a curved plate portion 10371 extending in the vertical direction (perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 76) along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 10326a, and the curved plate portion 10371. A plate-like lower plate portion 10372 extending from the lower end portion to the inner peripheral side, and the lower plate portion 10372 pierced in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 76) along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 10326a. A guide hole 10373 through which the guide extension portion 10331e is inserted, and a gear tooth 10374 that protrudes toward the inner peripheral side of the curved plate portion 10371 and can be engaged with the drive gear of the drive motor 10336. And the main.

  When rotating the container 10330, the drive motor 10336 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 76 from the state shown in FIG. As a result, the drive gear of the drive motor 10336 meshes with the gear teeth 10374, and the container 10330 rotates.

  When the container 10330 rotates, the hook-shaped tip of the guide extension portion 10331e is inserted into the guide hole portion 10373 of the arc-shaped plate member 10370. Since the guide hole portion 10373 is formed in an arc shape centering on the shaft support hole 10326a, the leading end of the guide extension portion 10331e is guided inside the guide hole portion 10373 as the container 10330 rotates. . Thereby, it can suppress that the container 10330 wobbles in the direction of axis collapse at the time of rotation.

  In addition, even when the container 10330 is stopped, resistance to shaft collapse in multiple directions can be generated as compared with the case where the guide extension portion 10331e is inserted through a straight long hole. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 76, not only when the container 10330 tilts in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 76), but also when the container 10330 tilts in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 76), The container 10330 can be given resistance in the direction opposite to the axis collapse.

  Here, when the container 10330 is pivotally supported at both ends in the rotation axis direction, a stopper for stopping the rotation of the container 10330 is placed in the vicinity of one pivotal support position, and the rotation of the container 10330 is restricted by the stopper. In this case, it is difficult to suppress the portion of the container 10330 in the vicinity of the other axial view position from flowing due to inertia because of the length of the container 10330 in the rotation axis direction. It becomes necessary to arrange a stopper.

  In this case, if the timing at which the container 10330 comes into contact with the pair of stoppers is shifted due to the displacement or wear of the stopper, the container 10330 may vibrate at the stop position, and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body There has been a problem that the production effect cannot be effectively exhibited. On the other hand, it is possible to pivotally support the container 10330 at the intermediate part by allowing the pivotal support part to enter the internal space of the container 10330. However, in this case, the second rotating body 340b and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 are used. There is a problem that the arrangement area of the is narrowed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the container 10330 is pivotally supported at the lower end by the shaft support hole 10326a, while the intermediate portion in the height direction of the container 10330 is accommodated by the guide extension part 10331e. Since it is connected to the circular arc plate member 10370 formed in a shape along a circle centering on the rotation axis of the 10330, it is possible to reduce the interval between the support positions of the container 10330 while securing the internal space of the container 10330. it can. Thereby, since the number of stoppers that stop the rotation of the container 10330 can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the container 10330 from vibrating at the stop position. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b or the vertical axis rotating body 10340.

  76 and 77 (a), when the container 10330 rotates, the rack gear portion 10331RF2 meshed with the fixed gear 10326b slides in the width direction (FIG. 77 (a) vertical direction) of the container 10330. Moving. Accordingly, the reflecting member 10331RF connected and fixed to the rack gear portion 10331RF2 can be slid along with the rotation of the container 10330 (see FIGS. 81 to 83).

  In the present embodiment, the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is continuously provided at a position facing the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b, and the direction in which the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b are provided continuously (FIG. 76). Since the rotation axis of the container 10330 is formed along the direction perpendicular to the paper surface, the rotation radius of the container 10330 can be suppressed as compared to the case where the rotation axis is formed in the left-right direction or the front-rear direction.

  78 (a) is a side view of the container 10330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIa in FIG. 75, and FIG. 78 (b) is a front view of the container 10330 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a). It is. 78A and 78B show a state where the side wall body 10332, the partition wall body 10334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

  Here, when the reflecting member 10331RF is formed of a plurality of mirrors arranged continuously around the vertical axis rotating body 10340 while forming a predetermined angle, an angle at which the figure visually recognized through the mirror is directed to the mirror From this difference, it is visually recognized in a mode of being cut at the boundary between adjacent mirrors. Therefore, when the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 visually recognized through the reflecting member 10331RF and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b and directly viewed by the player are simultaneously viewed. The feeling of discomfort increases.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the axis line (boundary line between the two mirrors) of the shaft support part RFC2 (see FIG. 80) of the reflecting member 10331RF is the vertical axis rotating body. It is formed on the back side of 10340 and is invisible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a figure that is visually recognized to the left and right of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 through the reflecting member 10331RF from being cut by the axis of the shaft support portion RFC2. As a result, the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 as a single-plate figure can be visually recognized on the entire surface of the reflecting member 10331RF respectively disposed on the left and right of the vertical axis rotating body 10340. A sense of discomfort can be reduced when viewed on the outer peripheral surface of the two-rotor 340b and viewed simultaneously with a graphic that is directly visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting means of the second rotating body 340b is angularly reflected on the side surface (for example, the side wall body 333) on which the rotation shaft of the second rotating body 340b is supported. First, only the light emitted from the light emitting means disposed inside the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is reflected and visually recognized by the player. That is, the surface of the housing 10330 from which light emitted from the light emitting means of one rotating body is reflected and the surface of the housing 10330 from which light emitted from the light emitting means of the other rotating body is reflected are separated. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), the recessed portion 10331d is formed to have the same thickness as the lower bottom plate 10331c, and the inner peripheral surface thereof internally supports the rotary shaft 10341, and the outer peripheral surface is internally fitted in the axial support hole 10326a. It is pivotally supported. For this reason, the rotating shaft 10341 can be used as a reinforcing core while improving the moldability of the recessed portion 10331d and the lower bottom plate 10331c (the resistance to the compressive load in the radial direction can be increased), so that the container 10330 rotates. It is possible to prevent the recessed portion 10331d from being damaged.

  79A is a bottom view of the upper intermediate plate 10331a, and FIG. 79B is a cross-sectional view of the upper intermediate plate 10331a taken along the line LXXIXb-LXXIXb of FIG. 79A. As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the upper intermediate plate 10331a includes a main body 10331a1 formed of an opaque resin material having a rectangular outer shape and a front side of the main body 10331a1 (FIG. 79). (A) upper) a groove 10331a2 recessed around the center, avoiding the center, and a shaft support hole 10331a3 that is formed in a circular shape substantially at the center of the main body 10331a1 and supports the vertical rotation body 10340; Is mainly provided.

  Since the main body 10331a1 is formed of an opaque resin material, the light emitted from the LED (not shown) disposed inside the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b are disposed inside. It is possible to prevent light emitted from the LED 344 (see FIG. 19) from being mixed.

  The groove portion 10331a2 is a recessed portion for guiding a shaft support portion RFC2 and the like (see FIG. 80) that protrudes upward from the reflecting member 10331RF, and the side on which the rectangular window portion 10333b is formed (FIG. 79A). The right side is curved, and the opposite side (left side in FIG. 79A) of the rectangular window portion 10333b is bent vertically.

  The upper intermediate plate 10331a may be integrally formed with the base 331 (see FIG. 77), or may be formed as a separate member and fastened and fixed to the base 331.

  Further, the upper surface of the main body 10331a1 may be formed in a mirror shape. Thereby, the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the 2nd rotary body 340b can be reflected with the upper side intermediate | middle board 10331a, and a player can visually recognize it.

  Fig. 79 (c) is a top view of the lower intermediate plate 10331b, and Fig. 79 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the lower intermediate plate 10331b along the line LXXIXd-LXXIXd in Fig. 79 (c). As shown in FIGS. 79 (c) and 79 (d), the lower intermediate plate 10331b is formed in a U-shaped plate shape in which the front side (lower side in FIG. 79 (c)) is cut out. 10331b1 and a groove 10331b2 recessed mainly around the front (downward in FIG. 79 (c)) center of the main body 10331b1.

  The groove portion 10331b2 is a recessed portion that guides a shaft support portion RFC2 and the like (see FIG. 80) that protrudes downward from the reflecting member 10331RF, and is formed in a shape that mirrors the groove portion 10331a2.

  A cutout in the center of the main body 10331b1 is a cutout in which the rotation shaft 10341 is disposed (see FIG. 78 (b)).

  FIG. 80A is a front perspective view of the reflecting member 10331RF, and FIG. 80B is a partially exploded front perspective view of the reflecting member 10331RF shown by disassembling the connecting portion of the reflecting member 10331RF.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the reflecting member 10331RF includes a plate-like central reflecting member 10331RF disposed at the center, and a plate-like right reflecting member 10331RFR connected to the right side of the central reflecting member RFC in front view. And a plate-like left side reflection member 10331RFL coupled to the left side of the central reflection member RFC when viewed from the front.

  The central reflecting member 10331RFC mainly includes a main body portion RFC1 formed in a rectangular plate shape and a cylindrical shaft support portion RFC2 disposed at the upper and lower corner portions of the main body portion RFC1.

  The shaft support portion RFC2 is a portion guided inside the groove portion 10331a2 (see FIG. 79 (a)), and has an outer diameter of the groove portion 10331a2 (see FIG. 79 (a)) of the upper intermediate plate 10331a and the lower intermediate plate 10331b. It is formed slightly smaller than the width of the groove portion 10331b2 (see FIG. 79C).

  The left reflecting member 10331RFL includes a main body part RFL1 formed in a rectangular plate shape, a projecting part RFL2 projecting outward from the vertical angle on the central reflecting member 10331RFC side of the main body part RFL1, and a projecting part It mainly includes a columnar pin portion RFL3 protruding in the vertical direction from two corner portions excluding the corner portion where RFL2 is formed.

  The projecting portion RFL2 is a portion inserted into the inner peripheral side of the shaft support portion RFC2, and the diameter thereof is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support portion RFC2. The projecting portion RFL2 is formed so as to be able to be recessed from the main body portion RFL1, and when attached to the central reflecting member 10331RFC, the main body portion RFL1 is disposed between the central reflecting member 10331RFC in a state of being recessed inside. It arrange | positions in the position where the axis line of part RFL2 and the axis line of axial support part RFC2 correspond (projection part RFL2 protrudes in the position).

  The pin portion RFL3 is a portion guided inside the groove portion 10331a2 of the upper intermediate plate 10331a and the groove portion 10331b2 of the lower intermediate plate 10331b (see FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (c)), and the outer peripheral diameter is the groove portion. The width is made slightly smaller than the widths of 10331a2 and the groove 10331b2.

  In a state where the projecting portion RFL2 is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the shaft support portion RFC2, the reflecting member 10331RF is disposed between the upper intermediate plate 10331a and the lower intermediate plate 10331b, and the shaft support portion RFC2 and the pin portion RFL3 are groove portions. By being inserted into 10331a2 and 10331b2, the reflecting member 10331RF can be integrally moved.

  Note that the configuration of the right reflecting member 10331RFR is symmetrical with the left reflecting member 10331RFL, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, the sliding movement of the reflecting member 10331RF accompanying the rotation of the container 10330 will be described. 81 to 83, the container 10330, the lower intermediate plate 10331b, the reflecting member 10331RF, and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 are schematically shown in cross section, and in order to facilitate understanding, the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is Only the outline is shown.

  81 (a), 82 (a), and 83 (a) show the container 10330, the lower intermediate plate 10331b, the reflecting member 10331RF, and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 along the line LXXXIa-LXXXIA in FIG. 78 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

  FIG. 81 (b) is a partial front view of the container 10330, the lower intermediate plate 10331b, the reflecting member 10331RF, and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIb in FIG. 81 (a). 82A is a partial front view of the container 10330, the lower intermediate plate 10331b, the reflecting member 10331RF, and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIIb in FIG. 82A. FIG. 83B is a view in FIG. It is a fragmentary front view of the container accommodating body 10330, the lower side intermediate | middle board 10331b, the reflection member 10331RF, and the vertical axis | shaft rotary body 10340 in the arrow LXXXIIIb direction view.

  81 illustrates a state in which the container 10330 is in a posture in which the opening 335a (see FIG. 75) faces the front in the assembled state. In FIG. 82, the container 10330 rotates clockwise from the state in FIG. FIG. 83 shows a state in which the container 10330 is in a posture in which the rectangular window portion 10333b is directed to the front.

  As described above, the upper intermediate plate 10331a functions as a portion that supports the rotating shaft 10341. Here, the upper intermediate plate 10331a is disposed for the purpose of preventing the shapes drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b from being mixed and for the purpose of supporting the vertical axis rotating body 10340. Is done. When the interval between the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b is narrower, it is easier to express a sense of unity of the production of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b, so the upper intermediate plate 10331a is made thinner. On the other hand, if the upper intermediate plate 10331a is too thin, sufficient strength to support the longitudinal axis rotating body 10340 cannot be obtained, so the upper intermediate plate 10331a is preferably made thicker. There was a problem to do.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the upper intermediate plate 10331a is supported by the reflective member 10331RF that is bent with the lower intermediate plate 10331b, so that the reflective member 10331RF is supported. The rigidity of can be improved.

  As a result, the upper intermediate plate 10331a disposed so as not to mix figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b visually recognized through the reflecting member 10331RF is used as the vertical axis rotating body 10340. While maintaining the strength used as the support member, the thickness can be suppressed, and the interval between the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b can be narrowed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (b), according to the present embodiment, when the container 10330 is in a posture in which the opening 335a (see FIG. 75) is directed to the front, the reflections arranged on the left and right of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 are provided. Light is reflected by the member 10331RF, and a figure placed on the back side of the display portion 10343 can be visually recognized.

  Here, in the case where the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b are stored in the receiving body 10330 in such a manner that the rotation axes of the vertical rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b intersect at right angles, the length of the second rotating body 340b By matching the diameter of the rotation locus, the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b can be visually recognized by the player without a sense of incongruity.

  However, for example, when the axial length of the second rotating body 340b is longer than the diameter of the rotating locus of the second rotating body 340b as in the present embodiment, the diameter of the rotating locus of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is the second. Since it is longer than the rotation trajectory of the rotator 340b, as compared with the case where the vertical rotator 10340 and the second rotator 340b are arranged in parallel (in this case, the pair of rotators 340b and 10340 are assumed to have the same shape). There was a problem that the container 10330 became large.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the axial length of the second rotating body 340b is made longer than the length of the vertical rotating body 10340 in the direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction) (FIG. 81 (b)). The vertical rotator 10340 and the second rotator 340b have the same length in the direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction), so that the ordinate rotator 10340 projects in the front-rear direction of the second rotator 340b. Therefore, the size of the container 10330 can be suppressed.

  In addition, a mirror-like reflecting member 10331RF that reflects a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is arranged in a portion facing the outer peripheral surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 in the inner side surface of the housing 10330. Then, the length in the left-right direction viewed together with the reflecting member 10331RF and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is equal to that of the second rotating body 340b in the axial direction of the second rotating body 340b (FIG. 81 (b)). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the vertical axis rotating body 10340 and the second rotating body 340b without a sense of incongruity.

  In this case, among the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340, a portion that cannot be directly seen from the front, such as a portion copied to the reflecting member 10331RF, is drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b. In the figure, it is visually recognized integrally with a part facing the front surface of the container 10330 (for example, one alphabet “A” or the like is visually recognized in the entire inside of the opening 335a), and an effect without a sense of incongruity is performed. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each rotating body.

  Also, because of this configuration, the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 that is visually recognized through the reflecting members 10331RF arranged on the left and right of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 also rotates in the same manner as the vertical axis rotating body 10340. Therefore, it can be visually recognized as if another rotating body is connected to the left and right of the vertical axis rotating body 10340.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), most of the rectangular window portion 10333b is shielded by the right reflecting member 10331RFR, and the rectangular window portion 10333b can be prevented from being visually recognized in a front view. Thereby, it can suppress that the light from another effect member leaks through the rectangular window part 10333b.

  As shown in FIGS. 82A and 82B, when the container 10330 rotates, the reflecting member 10331RF slides by the mechanism described above with reference to FIGS. 77 and 76. At this time, the right reflection member 10331RFR moves in a direction to retract from the rectangular window portion 10333b, so that the inner (front side) surface of the reflection member 10331RF can be visually recognized from the outside of the rectangular window portion 10333b. Therefore, the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 reflected on the reflecting member 10331RF can be viewed through the rectangular window 10333b.

  As shown in FIGS. 83A and 83B, when the rectangular window portion 10333b of the container 10330 is directed to the front side (lower side in FIG. 83A), the right reflecting member 10331RFR is rectangular. Retracted to the outside of the window 10333b, the extending direction of the left reflecting member 10331RFL is directed in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, the vertical axis rotating body 10340 can be visually recognized through the entire rectangular window portion 10333b, and the size of the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 imaged on the left reflecting member 10331RFL is expressed as the vertical axis. By making it equal on the left and right of the rotating body 10340, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort felt by the player who visually recognizes the left reflecting member 10331RFL.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the second rotary body 340b (see FIG. 78 (b)) has the rotation axis directed to the player side in a state where the rectangular window portion 10333b of the container 10330 is directed to the front. Since the outer peripheral surface cannot be visually recognized, the stop position may be determined only by the vertical axis rotating body 10340 when determining the stop position of the rotating body. Therefore, for example, when a plurality of containers 10330 are connected to the left and right to form a series of symbols at the stopping positions of a pair of rotating bodies that are respectively accommodated, the degree of freedom of the stopping positions of the rotating bodies (of the rotating table) The selection of where to make the stop position) can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body.

  84 (a) and 84 (b) are top views of the container 10330, and FIG. 84 (c) is a front view of the container 10330 in the direction of arrow LXXXIVc in FIG. 84 (a). 84 (d) is a front view of the container 10330 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIVd in FIG. 84 (b). 84 (a) and 84 (c) show a state in which the opening 335a faces the front, and in FIGS. 84 (b) and 84 (d), FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (c). ), The state in which the container 10330 is rotated clockwise as viewed from above is shown.

  In the state shown in FIG. 84A, the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is stopped in a state where one surface of the display unit 10343 is inclined by an angle θ with respect to the front surface. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 84 (c), a state in which the container 10330 is rotated clockwise by an angle θ from the state shown in FIG. 84 (a) is illustrated. Thus, the rotation of the container 10330 can absorb the inclination of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 with respect to the front surface of one surface of the display unit 10343.

  Here, when the second rotating body 340b and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 rotate at different rotation angles, when the second rotating body 340b and the vertical axis rotating body 10340 are stopped, the phases of the both rotating bodies are changed. When it is required to match, the number of figures that can be combined is reduced, and the number of rotations required to make a desired figure combination appear is increased (for example, the rotation table illustrated in FIG. 20 is lengthened). ).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the container 10330 can rotate around the rotation axis of the vertical axis rotating body 10340, and the rotation of the container 10330 absorbs the inclination angle when the container 10330 is tilted and stopped. be able to. Therefore, the number of figures that can be combined can be increased (the state shown in FIG. 84 (a) is adopted as a stop position for allowing the player to visually recognize the figure later by changing the state shown in FIG. 84 (c)). In addition, the number of rotations required to display a desired combination of figures can be suppressed and the display can be performed in a short time.

  In addition, since the container 10330 is formed to be rotatable, for example, the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body is changed and visually recognized by changing the angle in the rotating direction of the vertical axis rotating body 10340. By sticking lenticular or the like (a member that can change a figure that can be visually recognized depending on an angle formed with the line of sight) on the outer peripheral surface of the body, it is possible to increase the figures that are visible when the rotating body is stopped.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. In the tenth embodiment, in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 10300, the case where the radial width of the vertical axis rotating body 10340 is shorter than the length of the second rotating body 340b in the rotational axis direction has been described. The pair of rotators 11340a and 11340b in the embodiment have substantially the same radial width and axial length. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 85 (a) is a front view of the container 11330 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 85 (b) is a front view of the container 11330 in a posture in which the side wall body 10333 of the container 11330 faces the front. . 85A and 85B show a state in which the side wall body 10332, the partition wall body 10334, and the decorative body are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 85A and 85B, in the eleventh embodiment, the base 11331 is formed narrower than the base 331 in the first embodiment. Further, the second rotating body 11340b has a display plate 11343A that is shorter than the display plates 343A to 343C of the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b), before and after the container 11330 rotates (see FIG. 85 (a)) and after the rotation (see FIG. 85 (b)), the left and right sides of the container 11330 Are substantially the same. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7, it is possible to suppress the space for arranging a plurality of containers 11330 on the left and right, and to arrange the rectangular windows 10333b of the containers 11330 after rotation. By narrowing, for example, when the related figures are visually recognized in the rectangular window portion 10333b of each container 11330, it is possible to make the figures easy to see together.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the container 11330 has a rotating shaft 11330a extending downward from its lower end, and a shaft support plate member 11326 (the fixed gear portion 10326b is omitted from the shaft support plate member 10326 of the tenth embodiment). Is supported rotatably. A rotating gear-shaped interlocking gear 11330b is disposed at the tip of the rotating shaft 11330a, and the rotating shaft 11330a and the interlocking gear 11330b are fastened and fixed to the bottom wall of the housing 11330 with screws or the like.

  The first rotating body 11340a includes a rotating shaft 11341a and a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear 11342a disposed at the tip of the rotating shaft 11341a.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), the drive motor 350 is provided with a drive gear 11351 formed from a two-stage gear (a two-stage gear formed from a rotational gear-shaped gear tooth and a bevel gear-shaped gear tooth). The drive gear 11351 is meshed with a transmission gear 11352 formed of a two-stage gear.

  In the transmission gear 11352, the bevel gear-shaped gear teeth are engaged with the transmission gear 11342a, whereby the first rotating body 11340a rotates when the transmission gear 11352 rotates.

  The drive gear 11351 includes a bevel gear-shaped bevel gear portion 11351a that is directly connected to and linked to the drive motor 350, and a spur gear portion 11351b that can be rotated or not switched depending on the rotation direction of the bevel gear portion 11351a. More specifically, the shaft portion of the bevel gear portion 11351a and the spur gear portion 11351b are connected by the above-described one-way clutch. For example, when the drive motor 350 rotates in the forward direction, the spur gear portion 11351b rotates and in the reverse direction. The spur gear portion 11351b is formed so as to stop when it rotates to the right.

  A transmission gear 11356 engaged with the bevel gear portion 11351a is rotatably supported on the bottom wall of the housing 11330.

  The transmission gear 11356 has a spur gear portion 11356a formed in a rotating gear shape, and a bevel gear shape that is connected to the spur gear portion 11356a by a one-way clutch at a shaft portion and formed in a bevel gear shape and meshed with the bevel gear portion 11351a. A gear portion 11356b. More specifically, the shaft portion of the spur gear portion 11356a and the bevel gear portion 11356b are connected by the above-described one-way clutch. For example, when the drive motor 350 rotates in the forward direction, the spur gear portion 11356a stops and reverse direction The spur gear portion 11356a is formed so as to rotate when it is rotated to the right.

  That is, depending on the rotation direction of the drive motor 350, the spur gear portion 11351b or the spur gear portion 11356a can be independently rotated. When the spur gear portion 11351b is rotated, the rotating bodies 11340a and 11340b are rotated by a transmission mechanism disposed above the spur gear portion 11351b. When the spur gear 11356b is rotated, the housing body 11330 is rotated by meshing with the interlocking gear 11330b. .

  It should be noted that the torsion spring CS1 made of an elastic material having spring elasticity so that the housing 11330 maintains the posture of FIG. 85A by urging the gear meshing with the spur gear portion 11356a. The urging means is arranged. The torsion spring CS1 has one end fixed to the bottom surface of the housing 11330 and the other end locked to a driven gear disposed on the opposite side of the interlocking gear 11330b with the spur gear portion 11356a interposed therebetween.

  86 (a) to 86 (d) are top views of the container 11330 illustrating the rotation of the container 11330 in time series. 86 (a) shows a posture in which the display plate 11343A of the second rotating body 11340b faces the front (see FIG. 85 (a)), and in FIG. 15 (b), from the state of FIG. 86 (a). The posture in which the container 11330 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise is shown (see FIG. 85 (b)). In FIG. 86 (c), the container 11330 rotates clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 86 (b). The rotated state is illustrated, and FIG. 86 (d) illustrates a state in which the container 11330 has been returned from the state illustrated in FIG. 86 (c) to the state illustrated in FIG. 86 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 86, the shaft support plate member 11326 is provided with a locking device 11327 that holds the posture of the container 11330.

  The locking device 11327 includes a portion that changes its state at two positions by a notch mechanism, a switch portion 11327a that is pushed by the container 11330, an L-shaped lock portion 11327b that changes its posture depending on the state of the switch portion 11327a, Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the switch portion 11327a is disposed along the back surface side of the container 11330, and the container 11330 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise. When the drive motor 350 is rotated and the container 11330 is rotated clockwise, the switch part 11327a is pressed once on the side wall of the container 11330, so that the attitude of the lock part 11327b is changed and the side of the container 11330 is changed. The lock portion 11327b is fitted and the container 11330 is locked (see FIG. 86 (b)).

  When the container 11330 is further rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 86 (b) (see FIG. 86 (c)), the switch portion 11327a is pushed a second time, and the lock portion 11327b is moved to the original position (FIG. 15). (Refer to FIG. 86D). From this state, the container 11330 is rotated counterclockwise by the urging force of the urging means (not shown) described above and returned to the state of FIG. 86 (a). Accordingly, the rotating bodies 11340a and 11340b rotate when the drive motor 350 is rotated in one direction, while the attitude of the container 11330 is changed (reciprocating operation) when the drive motor 350 is rotated in the other direction. Can be made.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which a figure fixed to each of the display plates 343A to 343C of the pair of rotating bodies 340a and 340b is drawn, but each of the display plates 12A to 12C and 12A ′ to 12th embodiment. In 12C ′, different figures can be visually recognized depending on the angle viewed by the player. Of the pair of rotators 12340a and 12340b, the display plates of the first rotator 12340a will be described with reference to the first display plate 12A, the second display plate 12B, and the third display plate 12C, and each of the second rotators 12340b. The display panel will be described with reference to the first display panel 12A ′, the second display panel 12B ′, and the third display panel 12C ′, and the same parts as those in the above embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. To do.

  87 (a) to 87 (c) are external views of the first rotating body 12340a in the twelfth embodiment. 87 (a) to 87 (c), the drawings are divided into an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage. A front view of the first rotating body 12340a is shown on the left side, and the first corresponding to the right side is shown. A side view of the rotator 12340a is shown. 87 (a) to 87 (c), the upper part from the center of the first rotating body 12340a is omitted, and the lower part of FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (c) is the first rotation. Illustration of the lower part from the center of the body 12340a is omitted.

In the present embodiment, a figure changing member RK12 having a structure (so-called “lenticular structure”) in which a visible symbol changes depending on a viewing angle is attached to each of the display boards 12A to 12C.
Formed with. Note that the predetermined angle at which the visible symbol changes is 60 degrees in this embodiment. Hereinafter, how the display boards 12A to 12C are seen will be described.

  FIG. 87A explains how the graphic changes on the first display panel 12A depending on the viewing angle. 87A shows the state where the first display panel 12A faces the front. In the upper part of FIG. 87A, the first rotating body 12340a is tilted 60 degrees forward from the middle part of FIG. The state in which the display board 12A is disposed below the center is illustrated. In the lower part of FIG. 87 (a), the first rotating body 12340a tilts back 60 degrees from the middle part of FIG. 87 (a), and the first display board 12A The state arrange | positioned above a center is illustrated.

  In FIG. 87 (b) and FIG. 87 (c), each display board is shown in the same manner as in the condition of FIG. 87 (a). That is, FIG. 87 (b) illustrates a view in which the second display board 12B is viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (c) illustrates a state in which the third display board 12C is viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (c), the graphic displayed on each of the display boards 12A to 12C changes into three types depending on the posture of the first rotating body 12340a.

  88 (a) to 88 (c) are external views of the second rotating body 12340b. 88 (a) to 88 (c), the drawings are divided into an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage. A front view of the second rotating body 12340b is shown on the left side, and a second corresponding to the right side is shown. A side view of the rotator 12340b is shown. 88 (a) to 88 (c), the upper part from the center of the second rotating body 12340b is omitted, and the lower part of FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (c) is the second rotation. Illustration of the lower part from the center of the body 12340b is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, a figure changing member RK12 having a structure (so-called “lenticular structure”) in which a visible symbol changes depending on a viewing angle is attached to each of the display boards 12A ′ to 12C ′. Note that the predetermined angle at which the visible symbol changes is 60 degrees in this embodiment. Hereinafter, how the display panels 12A 'to 12C' are seen will be described.

  FIG. 88A explains how the graphic changes depending on the viewing angle of the first display panel 12A ′. 88 (a) shows a state in which the first display panel 12A 'faces the front, and in the upper part of FIG. 88 (a), the second rotating body 12340b is tilted 60 degrees forward from the middle part of FIG. 88 (a). The state in which the first display board 12A ′ is disposed below the center is shown. In the lower part of FIG. 88 (a), the second rotating body 12340b tilts back 60 degrees from the middle part of FIG. A state in which 12A ′ is arranged on the upper side from the center is illustrated.

  88 (b) and 88 (c), each display board is shown in the same manner as in the condition of FIG. 88 (a). That is, FIG. 88B illustrates a view in which the second display panel 12B ′ is viewed from the front, and FIG. 88C illustrates a state in which the third display panel 12C ′ is viewed from the front. The

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (c), the graphic displayed on each of the display boards 12A 'to 12C' changes into three types depending on the posture of the second rotating body 12340b.

  89 (a) to 89 (c) are external views of a pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b. 89 (a) to 89 (c) show a state in which a pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b are vertically connected, a front view is shown on the left side, and a side view is shown on the right side. Is done.

  89 (a) shows a state in which the first display boards 12A and 12A ′ are directed to the front, and FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which the second display boards 12B and 12B ′ are directed to the front. FIG. 89 (c) shows a state in which the third display panels 12C and 12C ′ are directed to the front.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (a), in the state where the first display boards 12A and 12A ′ are directed to the front, the figure “number 7” is visually recognized, and as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the second display In the state where the plates 12B and 12B ′ are directed to the front, the figure of “cherry” is visually recognized. As shown in FIG. 89C, in the state where the third display plates 12C and 12C ′ are directed to the front, “watermelon” "Is visually recognized.

  90 (a) to 90 (c) are external views of a pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b. 90 (a) to 90 (c) show a state in which a pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b are connected in a vertical direction, a front view is shown on the left side, and a side view is shown on the right side. Is done.

  FIG. 90 (a) shows a state in which the pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b have been rotated 60 degrees forward (counterclockwise in the side view) from the state of FIG. 89 (a). FIG. 90B shows a state in which the pair of rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b has been rotated 60 degrees forward from the state of FIG. 89B, and FIG. 90C shows a pair of the rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b from the state of FIG. A state in which the rotating bodies 12340a and 12340b are rotated 60 degrees forward is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the state where the tops between the first display boards 12A and 12A ′ and the second display boards 12B and 12B ′ are directed to the front, the figure of “lightning bolt” is visually recognized. As shown in FIG. 90B, in the state where the tops between the second display boards 12B and 12B ′ and the third display boards 12C and 12C ′ are directed to the front, the figure of “bells” is visually recognized. In the state where the tops between the first display boards 12A and 12A ′ and the third display boards 12C and 12C ′ are directed to the front, as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the case of being visually recognized in the direction facing the top of each rotating body 12340a, 12340b, the visually recognized figure is a figure related to a pair of display boards adjacent to the top (for example, A figure (see the upper part of FIG. 87 (a)) visually recognized with the first display board 12A arranged downward and a figure visually recognized with the first display board 12B arranged upward (FIG. 87 (b)). ) (See the bottom row) and the figure of “lightning” is visible.)

  Therefore, the first rotator 12340a and the second rotator 12340b are triangular prisms, and the stop position is configured not only when each surface stops in front but also when the top is stopped forward. can do. As a result, the number of combinations of the stop positions of the first rotating body 12340a and the second rotating body 12340b is set to the square of 3 (only the posture in which each of the display boards 12A to 12C and 12A ′ to 12C ′ is directed to the front is stopped. The position can be increased from 6 to the square of 6 (when the top portion between the display boards 12A to 12C and 12A ′ to 12C ′ is also directed to the front).

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. In the twelfth embodiment, a case has been described in which the visually recognizable figure changes each time the display boards 12A to 12C and 12A ′ to 12C ′ in the twelfth embodiment rotate 60 degrees. The display boards 13A to 13C and 13A ′ to 13C ′ are figures having a structure (so-called “lenticular structure”) in which different figures can be visually recognized by changing the viewing angle by the player slightly (about 12 degrees). The change member RK13 is pasted.

  Of the pair of rotators 13340a and 13340b, each display plate of the first rotator 13340a will be described with reference to the first display plate 13A, the second display plate 13B, and the third display plate 13C, and each of the second rotators 13340b. The display panel will be described with reference to the first display panel 13A ′, the second display panel 13B ′, and the third display panel 13C ′, and the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. To do.

  91A to 91C are external views of the first rotating body 13440a in the thirteenth embodiment. 91A to 91C, a front view of the first rotating body 13440a is shown on the left side, and a side view of the first rotating body 13340a corresponding to the right side is shown. FIG. 91A shows a state where the first display panel 13A is directed to the front. In FIG. 91B, the first rotating body 13440a is slightly inclined from the state of FIG. FIG. 91 (c) shows a state in which the first rotating body 13440a is tilted backward by a slight angle θ (about 12 degrees) from the state of FIG. 91 (a). .

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), a graphic of “apple” is shown on the first display board 13A. 91 (b) and 91 (c), the size when the “apple” illustrated in FIG. 91 (a) is viewed as it is is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the lenticular structure of the figure changing member RK13 is illustrated. The size of the figure of “apple” that is actually visually recognized is shown by a solid line.

  Here, in FIG. 91 (a) to FIG. 91 (c), the figure of “apple” is visually recognized with a common size. That is, even when the rotating body 13340a is slightly rotated, the same figure can be visually recognized with the same size, so that the stop positions of the pair of rotating bodies 13440a and 13440b are slightly shifted (see FIG. 21B). ), It is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity in the visually recognized figure.

  On the other hand, by forming the lenticular structure of the figure changing member RK13 in a manner in which the figure visually recognized on the first display board 13A becomes a different figure by slightly tilting the first rotating body 13440a, It can appear as if different figures are visible on the same surface (for example, the first display panel 13A). At this time, since the tilt angle of the first rotating body 13440a is slight, it is as if the figure of the same display board 13A suddenly changed without notifying the player that the angle being viewed has changed. Can show.

  92 (a) to 92 (c) are side views of the container 13330 in which the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b are stopped after being rotated. In FIG. 92, the container 13330 is schematically shown. In FIG. 92A, the upper position (for example, the third symbol display) that faces the player's line of sight within the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1). The state in which the container 13330 is disposed at the intermediate position of the device 81 (see FIG. 2) is shown. In FIG. 92B, the state is slightly lowered from the state of FIG. 92A in the direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction). The state in which the container 13330 is arranged at the middle position is shown, and in FIG. 92 (c), the container 13330 is arranged at the lower position slightly lowered in the direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction) from the state of FIG. 92 (b). The state is shown.

  In FIG. 92 (b), since the angle formed between the vertical direction of the player's line of sight and the first display board 13A is the angle θ, the player makes the state shown in FIG. 92 (a) on the first display board 13A. The figure of “apple” (see FIG. 91 (b)) is visually recognized without changing to the figure visually recognized.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 92 (c), since the angle formed by the vertical direction of the player's line of sight and the first display board 13A is the angle 2θ, the figure that is visible as it is is visible in FIG. 91 (a). It changes from the figure of “apple”. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 13340a tilts backward by an angle θ, so that the normal direction of the first display board 13A changes to the player's line of sight, and the first direction of the player's line of sight Since the angle formed with the first display board 13A is the angle θ, the player does not change the figure displayed on the first display board 13A in the state shown in FIG. 91 (b)) is visually recognized. Accordingly, the angle at which the first rotating body 13340a is tilted backward can be suppressed (from the angle 2θ to the angle θ), so that the moving speed of the container 13330 in the vertical direction can be reduced through the first display board 13A. The speed required for the first rotating body 13340a to fall backward can be suppressed in order to keep the appropriate figure visible. Therefore, the performance required for the drive motor 350 can be suppressed.

  The height of the player's line of sight may be detected by a detection device such as a camera provided in the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1). Thereby, the difference in the direction of the line of sight due to the difference in the player's physique can be detected on the gaming machine side, and each rotation for setting the angle formed between the vertical direction of the player's line of sight and the display board 13A to the angle θ. The inclination angle of the bodies 13340a and 13340b can be corrected.

  FIG. 93 shows an example of a figure visually recognized through the first display boards 13A and 13A ′ of the respective rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b. 93 (a) and 93 (b) are front views of a pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b. In addition, in FIG. 93, illustration of the axial direction outer side part of the end surface board 342 of a pair of rotary body 13340a, 13340b is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the player sees the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b when the container 13330 is disposed at the upper position (see FIG. 92 (a)). In (b), on the assumption that the eye height of FIG. 93 (a) and the player's eye height do not change, the container 13330 is disposed at a lower position below the upper position (FIG. 92 ( c) shows a state in which the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b is visually recognized by the player.

  Here, in the state shown in FIG. 92 (a), it is necessary to create a gap between the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b visually recognized by the player in order to maintain the rotation of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b. There is. Therefore, even if the display surfaces (for example, the first display surfaces 13A and 13A ′) of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b display a figure that makes sense for the first time when they are viewed together, the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340a, Since it is difficult to fill the gap between 13340b, the effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), figures (for example, a pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b) each having a meaning are individually defined by the figure changing members RK13 attached to the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b. By displaying “apple” on each display), it is possible to prevent the figure from being divided by the gap between the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b, and to maintain the effect.

  On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 92 (c) (the state in which the display surface 13A is lowered with respect to the height of the player's eyes results in the angle θ between the player's line of sight and the display surface 13A). ), The pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b visually recognized by the player is changed in posture by a predetermined angle, and the gap between the player and the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b is filled (in a direction perpendicular to the player's line of sight). It is visually recognized in the posture along the longitudinal direction of the end face plate 342 of the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b. Therefore, when the display surfaces of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b (for example, the first display surfaces 13A and 13A ′) are visually recognized as a single unit by the figure changing member RK13 attached to the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b. A figure that makes sense (for example, the display surface 13A, 13A 'of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a, 13340b as a single surface, the figure "7" shown on the surface, see FIG. 93 (b)) Is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the effect of the pair of rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b.

  That is, the figure changing member RK13 pasted on the display surfaces 13A and 13A ′ is a figure that completes on each display surface 13A and 13A ′ (for example, the “apple” figure, see FIG. 93A), depending on the viewing angle. By making it possible to visually recognize the figure (for example, figure “7”, see FIG. 93 (b)) that makes sense only when each display surface 13 </ b> A, 13 </ b> A ′ is visually recognized as one body, Under the premise that the height is constant, it is possible to improve the effect of the pair of rotary bodies 13340a and 13340b that move up and down.

  94 (a) to 94 (c) are side views of the container 13330. FIG. In FIG. 94, the container 13330 is schematically shown. In FIG. 94A, the container 13330 is disposed at the upper position in the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1) that faces the player's line of sight. FIG. 94 (b) shows a state in which the container 13330 is disposed at the middle position slightly lowered from the state of FIG. 94 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction). ) Shows a state in which the container 13330 is arranged at the lower position slightly lowered in the direction perpendicular to the axis (radial direction) from the state of FIG. 94 (b).

  FIG. 94 shows a state where the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b are reciprocally rotated in accordance with the vertical movement of the container 13330. That is, in FIG. 94 (b) and FIG. 94 (c), the first display board 13A is tilted backward as the container 13330 is lowered, and the state where the player's line of sight and the first display board 13A intersect perpendicularly is maintained. In this manner, the postures of the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b are controlled. Further, when the container 13330 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 94 (c), control is performed to rotate the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b in the forward rotation direction with the upward movement (see FIG. 94 (b)). .

  As a result, when it is assumed that the player's eyes are arranged at the same height, the figure visually recognized by the player can always be kept the same, so the angle formed with the player's line of sight changes. While adopting a lenticular structure for the first display board 13A, which is easy to perform, it is possible to perform control for allowing the player to visually recognize the same figure for a long time through the first display board 13A. In addition, since the first display board 13A intersects perpendicularly to the player's line of sight, the figure displayed on the first display board 13A can be easily seen.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the container 13330 slides up and down has been described. However, the container 14330 in the fourteenth embodiment can be swung in the forward tilting direction. In the fourteenth embodiment, the same display plates 13A to 13C and 13A 'to 13C' as the thirteenth embodiment are used as the display plates. That is, each of the display boards 13A to 13C and 13A 'to 13C' in the present embodiment has a structure in which different figures can be visually recognized by changing the viewing angle by the player slightly (about 12 degrees) (so-called "" Lenticular structure ”).

  Of the pair of rotators 13340a and 13340b, the display plates of the first rotator 13340a are illustrated by the first display plate 13A, the second display plate 13B, and the third display plate 13C, and each of the second rotators 13340b is illustrated. The display boards are illustrated by the first display board 13A ′, the second display board 13B ′, and the third display board 13C ′, and the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. To do.

  95 (a) and 95 (b) are side views of the container 14330 and the connecting member 14325 (corresponding to the connecting member 325 (see FIG. 12) in the first embodiment) in the fourteenth embodiment. 95 schematically shows the container 14330, FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the container 14330 is erected, and FIG. 95 (b) shows that the container 14330 is housed from the state shown in FIG. 95 (a). A state in which the body 14330 is tilted by a predetermined amount is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), in the container 14330, a support portion 14330a disposed at the lower end of the back surface is pivotally supported by the connecting member 14325, and a support portion 14330b disposed at the back intermediate portion is connected to the connecting member 14325. It is supported by a solenoid device 14370 provided. When the solenoid device 14370 expands and contracts in the front-rear direction, the upper end portion of the container 14330 is moved in the front-rear direction, and the container 14330 stands up (see FIG. 95A) and tilted (see FIG. 95 (b)) can be configured.

  According to this embodiment, even in a state where the rotation of the first rotating body 13340a and the second rotating body 13340b is stopped, the housing body 14330 is tilted to swing the first rotating body 13340a with respect to the second rotating body 13340b. Thus, the correction of the angle of the surfaces of the respective rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b and the change of the length of the gap visually recognized between the first rotating body 13340a and the second rotating body 13340b can be performed together. it can.

  That is, in FIG. 95 (b), the angle θ at which the container 14330 tilts forward is the angle (about 12 degrees) at which the lenticular figure disposed on each display panel 13A of this embodiment changes. . Thus, the figure visually recognized by the player through each display board 13A or the like in the state of FIG. 95A is different from the figure visually recognized by the player through each display board 13A or the like in the state of FIG. 95B. Can be made.

  In addition, the gap H1 between the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b in FIG. 95 (a) is tilted forward by the angle θ as shown in FIG. 95 (b), so that the gap H2 (gap H2 = gap). H1 × COSθ). In this way, by shortening the gap between the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b visually recognized by the player, the display boards 13A and 13A ′ and the like of the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b can be viewed with a narrow interval. The effect of visually recognizing the figures drawn on the display boards 13A and 13A ′ as a unit can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 94, when the container 330 is moved up and down to change the angle formed between the display surfaces 13A and 13A 'of the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b and the player's line of sight, the player's eyes As the container 13330 is separated, there is a greater possibility that the first rotating body 13340a on the side closer to the player's eyes will be in a positional relationship that hides the second rotating body 13340b (see FIG. 94C).

  On the other hand, in the configuration in which the container 14330 is tilted in the front-rear direction as in this embodiment, the relationship between the height of the player's eyes and the height of each of the rotating bodies 13340a and 13340b does not change so much. It is difficult to construct a positional relationship in which the body is visually recognized by overlapping with the other rotating body. Thereby, the effect of each rotary body 13340a, 13340b can be maintained.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment is described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the cloth member 8382 of the shielding device 8380 is suspended downward by the driving force of the driving motor 350 has been described. However, the shielding device 8380 in the fifteenth embodiment is cloth-driven by the driving force of the driving motor 350. The member 8382 is wound up, and the locking device 15335b for fixing the cloth member 8382 is disposed above the rotation shaft 8381 of the shielding device 8380. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  96 (a) to 96 (d) are partial side views of the container 15330 in the fifteenth embodiment. 96A shows a state in which the cylindrical member 8383 is held by the locking device 15335b, and in FIG. 96B, the rotary shaft 8381 is wound up from the state of FIG. FIG. 96 (c) shows a state where the locking device 15335b is pushed in one step by 8383, and FIG. 96 (c) shows a state where the locking device 15335b is disposed at the release position and the columnar member 8383 is hanging downward. FIG. 96 (d) shows a state in which the cloth member 8382 is wound up and the columnar member 8383 pushes the locking device in one step from the state where the locking device 15335b is disposed at the release position.

  In order to facilitate understanding of the operation, FIG. 96 (a) shows an engagement piece 6342bt, an intermediate gear 8356, and a switching gear 8384, and FIGS. 96 (b) to 96 (d) show an intermediate gear. The illustration of 8356 and the switching gear 8384 is omitted.

  The locking device 15335b is a member that is disposed on the upper front end surface of the base 331 and that locks both ends of the cylindrical member 8383 of the shielding device 8380 (outside the cloth member 8382), and is locked by a notch mechanism ( 96 (a)) and the release state (see FIG. 96 (c)) can be switched.

  The cylindrical member 8383 slides along the guide groove 8334b. In addition, the switching gear 8384 is configured such that the rotation direction of the one-way clutch mechanism (see FIG. 96A) is opposite to that in the eighth embodiment. That is, when the switching gear 8384 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 96 (a), the driving force is transmitted to the rotating shaft 8381 and the cloth member 8382 is wound up. When the drive motor 350 (see FIG. 65 (a)) rotates in the direction in which the switching gear 8384 rotates clockwise in FIG. 96 (a), a pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are provided as in the eighth embodiment. (See FIG. 65 (b)) rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), when the cloth member 8382 is wound up by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a), the cylindrical member 8383 pushes the portion constituting the notch mechanism of the locking device 15335b in one step. When the driving force for rotating the rotary shaft 8381 is released, the locking device 15335b is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 96 (c)). Therefore, there is no member that supports the cylindrical member 8383, and the cylindrical member 8383 is, for example, a winding device 8333b (see FIG. 65B). In this embodiment, the winding device 8333b is disposed in the container 15330. Rotation shaft 8381 is rotated by the urging force of urging rotation shaft 8381 in the direction in which cloth member 8382 is extended with respect to 15330, and cloth member 8382 is extended.

  On the other hand, the cylindrical member 8383 is slid upward along the guide groove 8334b by winding the cloth member 8382 from the state where the cylindrical member 8383 is further suspended from FIG. 96 (c). Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), the locking member 15383 is pushed in one step from the position (release position) shown in FIG. 96 (c) by pushing the portion where the cylindrical member 8383 constitutes the notch mechanism of the locking device 15335b. 15335b can be placed in the locking position.

  Thereby, in addition to the function of sliding and moving the column member 8383 up and down to expand and contract the cloth member 8382 while driving the shielding device 8380 in one direction, the column member 8383 is locked by the locking device 15335b, It is possible to configure both the state in which the cylindrical member 8383 is unlocked by the locking device 15335b and the cylindrical member 8383 is movable.

  In this embodiment, when the locking device 15335b is disposed at the locking position, a clamping device (not shown) fixed to the container 15330 clamps the rotating shaft 8381, and the winding device 8333b is caused by the clamping force. Counter the power of Therefore, the cloth member 8382 can be prevented from being pushed out by the urging force of the winding device 8333b in the state shown in FIG.

  Further, as another method, the cloth member 8382 is configured to have a “cone shape” in which a plate member having high rigidity is continuously provided in the extending direction, so that the columnar member 8383 is in the state of FIG. In the arranged state, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft 8381 from rotating due to the urging force of the winding device 8333b and the cloth member 8382 to bend and start to sag downward. That is, the width of each plate member configured in a “border shape” is widened in the extending direction (for example, a width equal to or larger than the distance between the rotation shaft 8381 and the columnar member 8383), thereby rotating with the rigidity of the plate member. The rotation of the shaft 8381 can be stopped, and the state shown in FIG. 96 (d) can be maintained.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b each have three display surfaces (first to third display plates 343A to 343C), and the three-surface graphics. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of display surfaces n of the first rotator 340a and the number of surfaces m of the second rotator 340b are determined. Different values may be set.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b includes the driving gear 351, the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353. , 2353, 3353, intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and second gears 355, 2355, 3355 have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and second gear 355 are not limited thereto. , 2355, 3355 may be provided.

  For example, the intermediate gears 354, 2354, and 3354 are disposed on the first rotating body 340a, and the second gears 355, 2355, and 3355 are meshed with the intermediate gears 354, 2354, and 3354, and the second rotating body 340b. And a structure in which the drive shaft of the drive motor 530 is fixed to one of the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 or the second gears 355, 2355, 3355 is exemplified. According to such a structure, the number of gears can be reduced and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In each of the embodiments described above, in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the base body 331 is provided with the reflection portion RF on the front surface (inner surface) of the portion that forms the back surface of the container 330 (FIG. 18B). Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the reflection part RF may be disposed in another part. As another part, it is a part of base 331, and the inner surface of the part which forms the upper surface or lower surface of container 330 is illustrated. Since each of these surfaces is a surface on which the outer peripheral surfaces (display panels 343A to 343C) face each other when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, the light emitted from the LED 344 is sent to the player. It can be reflected so as to be visible.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflection is accompanied by the rotation. The gap between the inner surface of the base body 441 on which the plate RF is disposed and the outer peripheral surface of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (the interval in the vertical direction in FIG. 18 (b)) can be increased and decreased. The opposing angle of each rotating body 340a, 340b with each display plate 343A to 343C with respect to each inner surface of the substrate 441 disposed can be changed. Thereby, the aspect of the reflected light can be changed with respect to the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transmission part PN as the reflected light from the reflection part RF.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the rotation axes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged in parallel with each other in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 has been described. It may be what you do. Thereby, for example, the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second outer peripheral surface 340b can be displaced (moved) in directions orthogonal to each other. In this case, each of the display plates 344A to 344C is preferably formed on a square in front view. This is because when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are arranged side by side, it is possible to form a sense of unity of the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces thereof.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the number of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b) disposed in one container 330 is two in the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be three or more.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the base end side of the left and right arm bodies 430 is rotatably supported by the base body 410 in the central floating unit 400 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The base end side of the arm body 430 may be formed to be slidable with respect to the base body 410. Also by the slide displacement, the left and right arm bodies 430 can be independently displaced, so that the movement of the first member 440 can be changed as in the case of the above embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a, so that the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced (rotated) or have inertial force. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the arm body 430 and the first member 440 can be moved relative to each other. Another structure may be sufficient as the structure connected so that displacement is possible.

  As another structure, for example, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via an elastic member (for example, rubber-like elastic body, urethane, metal coil spring / torsion spring, leaf spring, etc.). In addition, a structure that enables relative displacement by elastic deformation of the elastic member, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected to each other by a shaft and a shaft hole, and the relative displacement is performed by rotation of the shaft with respect to the shaft hole. A structure that allows the distal end of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 to be connected to each other by a spherical ball and a stud that is in spherical contact with the ball, and a structure that enables relative displacement by rotation of the ball with respect to the stud. A structure in which the tip of the body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by one or a plurality of link mechanisms, and relative displacement is possible by deformation of the link mechanisms, and a part or all of these are assembled. Align were structures, and the like are exemplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation method when the central floating unit 400 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position has been described. However, each of these operation methods is an example, and other operation methods can naturally be adopted. . Therefore, for example, a part of the operation method shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 may be replaced with another operation method.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the case where the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolling) by inertia (inertial action) in the central floating unit 400, the case where the left and right arm bodies 430 are maintained in a stopped state. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 may be periodically displaced (rotated) with a predetermined amplitude before the first member 440 reciprocates left and right. Since the displacement of the arm body 430 is a periodic displacement with a predetermined amplitude, the reciprocation of the first member 440 is formed to the left and right without causing the player to recognize the movement of the arm body 430, and the reciprocation due to inertia is performed. The player can be made aware that it is continuing.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the arm member 444 has a bilaterally symmetric shape and the center of gravity is located at the center in the left-right direction in the central floating unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the arm member 444 is not necessarily limited thereto. The position of the center of gravity may be decentered to either one of the left and right directions. According to this, the reaction force applied to the base body 441 with the rotation of the arm member 444 can be increased, and the reciprocation (rolling) of the first member 440 in the left and right directions can be increased and a change can be given.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the central floating unit 400 and the left and right rotating bodies 500 and 5500, the displacement member 530 is brought into direct contact with the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441), thereby moving the first member 440. Although the case where the first member 440 is controlled or the first member 440 is caused to move is not limited to this, the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other. A similar operation may be performed.

  Specifically, a magnet is disposed on one of the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, and at the other end of the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530. When a magnet or an iron member is disposed and the displacement member 530 is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force is applied between one magnet and the other magnet or iron member, so that the first member 440 moves. A structure that restricts the movement or causes the first member 440 to move is exemplified.

  According to this, since the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other and the two can be prevented from coming into contact with each other, damage due to collision can be suppressed. Note that when an iron member is disposed on the other of the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, the magnetic force acting between one of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440. By balancing the magnetic force acting between the other of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440, the first member 440 is pulled between the left and right displacement members 530, so that Keep in contact.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the phase relationship between the second gear 6355 and the second rotating body 6340b is detected using the sensor unit 6342c1 formed of a non-contact magnetic sensor has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, an optical sensor that detects reflected light may be used at the same position. By providing a slit continuously provided in the circumferential direction at a portion of the second gear 6355 where the light of the optical sensor is projected, a period until the light is reflected and reaches the optical sensor is set. And the phase relationship between the rotating body 6340b and the rotating body 6340b. Thereby, the phase difference between the second gear 6355 and the rotating body 6340b can be detected.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the stop timing of the drive motor 350 is controlled by the phase difference between the second gear 6355 and the end face plate 6342 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sensor unit 6342c1 and The detection unit 6355c is not required, and the biasing force applied to the engagement piece 6342bt is large enough to rotate the second rotating body 6340b (the second rotating body 6340b is opposed to the weight of the second rotating body 6340b). 6340b may be configured to have a size capable of rotating.

  Here, when the second gear 6355 is stopped in a state where the engagement piece 6342bt is not in contact with the first wall surface 6355b1 but is in contact with the middle of the second wall surface 6355b2, the urging force applied to the engagement piece 6342bt is: The second gear 6355 and the end face plate 6342 are loaded in the direction of rotating in the circumferential direction. In this case, the second gear 6355 receives resistance from a plurality of gears constituting the transmission path FL1, and is difficult to rotate. However, the transmission path FL2 is in a state where the second gear 6355 and the intermediate gear 2354 are in a sliding state. Therefore, when the end face plate 6342 is rotated, no resistance is generated from the gears constituting the transmission path FL2.

  Therefore, if the urging force applied to the engagement piece 6342bt is strong enough to rotate the second rotating body 6340b, the end face plate 6342 can be rotated by the urging force applied to the engagement piece 6342bt, and accordingly. The phase between the second gear 6355 and the end face plate 6342 can be brought close to the phase at which the engagement piece 6342bt contacts the first wall surface 6355b1.

  In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the guide groove 8334b extends to the lower end of the opening 335a so that the cloth member 8382 can shield the entire pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b. For example, the guide groove may extend to a position where only the second rotating body 8340b is shielded (in the middle of the opening 335a).

  In this case, even if the cloth member 8382 is spread, the first rotating body 8340a cannot be shielded from the player, but the second rotating body 8340a is shielded, so that the figure of the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b becomes It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not they match (whether or not the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are arranged at the stop position). Therefore, the movement distance of the columnar member 8383 for expanding the cloth member 8382 is ensured while ensuring the effect that it is impossible to grasp whether or not the pair of rotating bodies 8340a and 8340b are disposed at the stop position until the cloth member 8382 is wound up. By shortening, the period until it changes from a shielding state to a visual recognition state can be shortened.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the rotating plate member 9380 of the rotating plate device 9380 takes the shielding state and the visual recognition state has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating plate member 9381 is in the vertical direction. May be stopped at 45 degrees. It is assumed that the container 9330 is arranged at a position looked down by the player, and the surface of the rotary plate member 9381 is configured to look up at the player.

  In this case, for example, a member that reflects light is used for the rotating plate member 9381, so that even if the irradiation direction of the LED 344 is the front-rear direction, the light reflected by the reflecting unit RF toward the rotating plate device 9380 is rotated. The surface of the plate member 9381 can be reflected toward the player side (directed upward). Accordingly, it is possible to improve the light effect while keeping the posture of the LED 344 fixed.

  Further, in this case, by setting the rotating plate member 9381 in a shielding state, light reflected by the reflecting portion RF toward the rotating plate device 9380 can be reflected to the front side by the surface of the rotating plate member 9381. When the container 9330 is disposed at the same height as the person's line of sight, the light effect can be improved by placing the rotating plate member 9381 in a shielding state.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Concept of Invention Taking Left / Right Sensor Device 600 as an Example>
A game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a light-transmitting transparent plate arranged on the front side of the game board with a space through which game media can pass, and a displacement on the back side of the game board A displacement member that can be arranged and made visible to the player through the opening of the game board, and a sensor device that detects an object on the front side of the transparent plate through the opening of the game board. In the gaming machine, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable up to a position overlapping at least a part of the detection area of the sensor device.

  Here, for example, an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light toward the front of a game board (a plate glass of the front frame) and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected from an object is provided, and the optical sensor allows the player to A device that detects the presence or movement of a finger is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-094348). In this case, the path of the light (irradiation light and reflected light) of the optical sensor is set so as not to overlap the movement region of the displacement member formed so as to be displaceable (for example, paragraph 0045 of JP 2010-094348 A). And FIG. 5). Therefore, there is a problem that the optical sensor and the displacement member are not related to each other, and the displacement member cannot be effectively used.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable up to a position that overlaps at least a part of the detection region of the sensor device, so that the displacement of the displacement member affects the detection region of the sensor device. Can do. In other words, the sensor device and the displacement member can be related to each other, whereby the displacement member can be utilized.

  The sensor device is a non-contact type object detection sensor, for example, an optical sensor device (an irradiation unit that emits light composed of visible light or invisible light, and an object (object) irradiated from the irradiation unit. And a light receiving means for receiving the light reflected by the light beam and evaluating the received light). As a method for evaluating the received light, a triangulation method that converts the imaging position of the light receiving means (PSD or C-MOS) into the presence / absence (distance) of an object, or the time required to receive light after irradiation A time-of-flight method for converting the value into the presence / absence (distance) of an object is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged at a predetermined interval from each other, and the displacement member includes a detection area of the first sensor and a detection area of the second sensor. A gaming machine A2 that can be displaced to a position that divides the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the displacement member can be displaced to a position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor. These two areas can be reliably separated. Thereby, for example, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the operation for causing the player to select one of the two detection areas.

  On the other hand, by evacuating the displacement member from the position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, it is possible to release the division of the two detection areas by the displacement member. Thereby, for example, in addition to the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, a detection area detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor can be formed.

  In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is displaceable in an area overlapping at least one of the detection area of the first sensor or the detection area of the second sensor, and the first sensor is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the size of at least one of the detection areas of the second sensor and the detection area of the second sensor is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the displacement member can displace a region overlapping at least one of the detection region of the first sensor or the detection region of the second sensor. With the displacement of the displacement member, the size of the detection area of at least one of the detection area of the first sensor or the detection area of the second sensor can be changed. Thereby, for example, when the player performs an operation of detecting his / her hand or finger, the player can search for the detection area.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position. That is, the sensor device can serve as both the means for detecting the object on the front surface side of the transparent plate and the means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member, and there is no need to separately provide a means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member. . Therefore, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, it is possible to reduce the component cost.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4 includes a light emitting means formed so as to be able to emit light, and the displacement member can be displaced to a position where light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked from entering the sensor device. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided, it is possible to produce an effect by light emission of the light emitting means. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked from entering the sensor device, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be prevented from being received by the sensor device. As a result, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, it is possible to suppress erroneous detection of the sensor device. In addition, since the member for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device can also be used as the displacement member, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member can be retracted from the shielding position, and a space can be secured, so that the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced. it can.

  In the gaming machine A5, a plurality of the light emitting means are arranged at different positions, and the displacement member receives light emitted from the light emitting means according to the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it can be shielded.

  According to the gaming machine A6, since the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at different positions, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the light emitting means that emits light among the plurality of light emitting means. In this case, since the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it is possible to shield the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device according to the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means, the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted from the sensor device. Can be suppressed from being received. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5. Further, in the case where a fixed member capable of shielding the light incident on the sensor device from light emission of any of the light emitting means is provided, a large space is required for the arrangement of such members. When the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the gaming machine A5 or A6 includes a second displacing member disposed on the back side of the gaming board so as to be displaceable, visible through an opening of the gaming board, and disposed with the light emitting means. According to a displacement position of the second displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it can shield light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device. A gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, since the light emitting means is disposed on the second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, it is possible to produce an effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light at different positions in accordance with the displacement of the second displacement member. . In this case, according to the displacement position of the second displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where it is possible to shield the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device. Can be suppressed from being received. As a result, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, in the case where a fixed member capable of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device is provided corresponding to the entire movable range of the second displacement member, a large space is provided for the arrangement of the member. However, when the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and light is emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor. A gaming machine A8, wherein the other one of the first sensor and the second sensor can receive light reflected by dirt on the transparent plate.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes the first sensor and the second sensor that are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and the first sensor or the second sensor Since the light emitted from one of the sensors and reflected by the transparent plate is formed so that the other of the first sensor or the second sensor can receive light, the first sensor and the second sensor are disposed at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. On the other hand, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate (for example, oil on the player's hand).

  For example, in the configuration in which one sensor device is disposed at a position deeper in the width direction than the edge of the opening of the game board and the light emitted from the sensor device is irradiated obliquely to the transparent plate, the sensor device in front view Can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the player, and an object (for example, a player's hand or finger) existing on the front side of the transparent plate can be detected. However, since the incident angle of the light emitted from the sensor device with respect to the transparent plate is large, the sensor device cannot receive the light reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, for example, the first sensor and the second sensor are disposed at positions deeper in the width direction than the edges of the opening, with the opening of the gaming board interposed therebetween, for example. It can be difficult for the player to see. In this case, when the light emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor is reflected by dirt on the transparent plate, the reflected light is received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor, and the transparent plate is stained. When there is no light, the light emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor passes through the transparent plate and is not received by the other of the first sensor or the second sensor. Thereby, the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate can be detected.

  In addition, it is preferable to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate by the first sensor and the second sensor in the process when the gaming machine is turned on. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, there is no need to distinguish between an object (player's hand or finger) on the front side of the transparent plate and dirt on the transparent plate because the player has not entered the store. This is because the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of dirt can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is characterized in that an absorbing material capable of absorbing the irradiated light is disposed on a surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. A gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbing material capable of absorbing the irradiated light on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Therefore, it can be avoided that the light reflected by the displacement member is received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by a displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control burden can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is formed of a material capable of transmitting the emitted light at a portion irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is formed of a material that can transmit the light emitted from the portion irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. The light reflected by the displacement member can be prevented from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by a displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control burden can be suppressed.

  Further, since the portion of the displacement member is formed of a material that can transmit the irradiated light, the light emitted from the sensor device is transmitted, and the transmitted light is transmitted to an object on the front side of the transparent plate. In addition to being able to irradiate, the light reflected by the object can be transmitted, and the transmitted light can be received by the sensor device. Thereby, a displacement member can be displaced, ensuring the detection area | region of a sensor apparatus.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is formed with a reflective surface that reflects the emitted light in a direction different from that of the sensor device on a surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. A gaming machine A11 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is a reflection that reflects the irradiated light in a direction different from that of the sensor device on the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the sensor device. Since the surface is formed, it can be avoided that the light reflected by the displacement member is received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by a displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control burden can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention taking the central floating unit 400 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable; a first member disposed so as to be relatively displaceable with the displacement member; and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member. A gaming machine B1 comprising a pair of arm members displaceable independently of each other, and the first member being connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

  Here, a displaceable displacement member is provided, and an effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. In addition, there is a type in which a first member is further provided on the front surface of the displacement member, and the first member is rotated to enhance the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-105873). However, in the above, there is a problem that the first member rotates while the displacement member and the first member are integrally displaced, and the change in the movement of the first member is poor.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the displacement member includes a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and the first member at one end of the pair of arm members is connected. By displacing independently, the displacement of both arm members and the displacement of the first member can be made different, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  Moreover, since the displacement member is connected to the arm member so as to be capable of relative displacement, the displacement of the arm member and the displacement of the first member can be made independent. That is, for example, when the arm member is displaced, the displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member, and both are displaced by independent displacement, or when the displacement of the arm member is stopped, the displacement of the first member is continued. And as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  In addition, as a form of displacement of the arm member, for example, a form in which the other end is rotated, a form in which the other end is slid, a combination of these (one of the arm members is rotated, and the other is slid , Forms to be employed respectively).

  Further, as a form in which one end of the arm member and the first member are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, for example, the shaft disposed on one of the arm member or the first member is pivoted on the shaft hole disposed on the other. A configuration in which the supported shaft is rotatable relative to the shaft hole so as to be relatively displaceable, and a pin disposed on one of the arm member or the first member slides along a sliding groove disposed on the other A configuration in which the arm member and the first member are connected via an elastic member, and the elastic member is elastically deformed so that the relative displacement can be performed, arranged on one of the arm member and the first member. The spherical member arranged on the other side is rotated in an arbitrary direction with respect to the stud that is in spherical contact with the ball, and the arm member and the first member have one or a plurality of link mechanisms (not deformed). Seki is a moving part Form that allows relative displacement by coupled linkage via a connected system) is deformed, and the form of a combination of each of these embodiments are illustrated by.

  In the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and by a driving force applied from the driving means. A gaming machine B2 that is rotated about the other end.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable. Since the other end is rotated by the driving force applied from the means, each one end of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate trajectories having different center positions. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to give the first member a motion that combines linear motion and rotational motion, and to change the motion.

  Note that the distance from one end to the other end of the pair of arm members may be set to the same length, or may be set to different lengths.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a slide groove is provided on one of the arm member or the first member, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the slide groove. A pin portion to be formed is disposed, and the sliding groove is formed between at least one end portion of the sliding groove or the other end portion and the pin portion in a state where the arm member is disposed at a reference position. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that a gap is formed therebetween.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the arm member and the first member are connected via the sliding groove and the pin portion, and at least the arm member is at the reference position. In the disposed state, a gap is formed between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin part, so even if the arm member is stopped, the first member It is possible to allow relative displacement with respect to the arm member. Thereby, a change can be given to a motion of the 1st member.

  For example, when the arm member is displaced at a predetermined speed and then stopped at the reference position, an inertial force generated by the stop is applied to the first member, so that the pin portion is directed toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. Thus, a reciprocating displacement can be formed. As a result, the first member can be reciprocated (swayed) after stopping the displacement of the arm member.

  In the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and a pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel to each other.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and the pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel, so that the displacement of the arm member is reduced. When the first member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member after being stopped at the reference position, the gap between one end of the sliding groove or the other end and the pin portion is A rotational component can be added to the relative displacement. Thereby, a change can be given to a motion of the 1st member.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member accompanying the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. And the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C shape.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C shape, so that after the reciprocation of the first member converges and stops, The first member can be maintained. Therefore, for example, it can suppress that the 1st member evacuated to the evacuation position rattles by disturbance. As a result, wear of the sliding groove and the connecting pin can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and by a driving force applied from the driving means. Rotating about the other end, the sliding groove is formed in a straight line and disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed in the first member. Game machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable. Since the other end is rotated by the driving force applied from the means, each one end of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate trajectories having different center positions. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to give the first member a motion that combines linear motion and rotational motion, and to change the motion.

  In this case, since the sliding groove is formed linearly and disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed on the first member, the direction of the sliding groove according to the rotation angle of the arm member ( (Inclination direction) can be changed. For example, the sliding grooves can be arranged in a substantially C shape or in a straight line. Thereby, for example, when the displacement of the arm member is stopped and the first member is reciprocated by the action of the inertial force, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C shape. The reciprocating motion can be quickly converged toward the center of the letter C while enabling the rotation component to be added to the movement, and when the sliding groove is arranged in a straight line, The movement can be only a linear component.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a straight line, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member accompanying the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. And the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, a gap formed between one end portion of the sliding groove or the other end portion and the pin portion allows movement of the first member by the action of gravity. A gaming machine B7, which is arranged in a direction to play.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between one end portion of the sliding groove or the other end portion and the pin portion is the first member by the action of gravity. Since the movement of the first member is arranged, in addition to the movement driven by the displacement of the arm member, the movement of the first member can be formed by the action of gravity without being moved by the movement of the arm member. . Thereby, a change can be given to a motion of the 1st member.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body portion to which one end of the arm member is coupled, a driven portion that is displaceably disposed on the main body portion, and a driven portion thereof. A gaming machine B8, comprising: second driving means for applying a driving force.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body part to which one end of the arm member is coupled, a driven part that is displaceably disposed on the main body part, Since the second driving means for applying a driving force to the driven part is provided, it is possible to produce an effect of relatively displacing the driven part with respect to the main body part by the driving force of the second driving means. In this case, since the reaction force accompanying the displacement of the driven portion is applied to the main body portion, the reaction force can form a displacement that reciprocates the pin portion toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. it can. As a result, the main body (first member) can be displaced (for example, reciprocating) in a state where the displacement of the arm member is stopped.

  In the gaming machine B8, the driven part is rotatably supported by the main body part and rotated by a driving force applied from the second driving means.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the driven part is rotatably supported by the main body part and is rotated by the driving force applied from the second driving means. In the state where the displacement of the member is stopped, when a reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit is applied to the main body portion to displace the main body portion, a rotation component can be easily generated in the movement of the main body portion.

  Examples of the shape of the driven part include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, and a long shape. In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the driven part may be decentered from the center of rotation (position supported by the main body part). Thereby, the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit can be increased, and the variation of the reaction force with respect to the rotation angle can be increased to change the movement of the main body unit.

  In the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven part is positioned between the pair of pin parts.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven part is located between the pair of pin parts, so that the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the driving part is reduced by the rotation of the main body part. It can be easily connected to movement.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10 includes a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the first member.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B10, the second displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the first member. With this contact, both the movement of the first member and the change of the movement of the first member can be achieved. For example, when the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the first member is displaced (reciprocated) by the inertial force generated when the arm member is stopped by bringing the second displacement member into contact with the first member. This can be suppressed. On the other hand, for example, when the arm member and the first member are stopped, the second displacement member collides with the first member and the first member is bounced off, so that the first member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member. It is possible to form a mode in which the first member is displaced or a mode in which the first member is displaced in a state of being integrated with the second displacement member.

  Further, when the first member includes the main body and the driven part, the second displacement member is kept in contact with the main body so that only the driven part is displaced while maintaining the main body in a stopped state. Can be made. That is, it is possible to form an aspect in which the main body part is displaced together with the driven part by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the driven part, and an aspect in which only the driven part is displaced.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11 includes a second displacement member formed to be displaceable, and a magnet is disposed on one of the first member or the second displacement member, and the first member or the first member A magnet or an iron member is disposed on the other of the two displacement members, and when the second displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force acts between the one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member. A gaming machine B12 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the gaming machine B12 includes the second displacement member formed to be displaceable, and is disposed on one of the first member and the second displacement member. Since a magnetic force acts between the magnet and the magnet or iron member disposed on the other of the first member or the second displacement member, the movement of the first member is regulated by the action of the magnetic force, or The first member can be displaced. For example, after the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the first member can be displaced (reciprocated) by the action of magnetic force by moving the second displacement member close to and away from the first member. In addition, since the displacement of the first member can be regulated by the action of magnetic force, it is not necessary to bring the first member and the second displacement member into contact with each other.

<About the concept of the invention using the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b as an example>
C1. A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface. In the gaming machine that allows the player to visually recognize the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body, the transmission means includes a rotating state of the first rotating body and a rotating state of the second rotating body. The gaming machine C1 is configured so that the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so as to be different from each other.

  Here, a first rotating body and a second rotating body having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer circumferential surface are provided, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated to be drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the first rotating body. There is known a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-220215). In this case, the first rotating body is driven to rotate independently by the first driving motor (driving means), and the second rotating body is driven to rotate independently by the second driving motor, and the figure of the first rotating body visually recognized by the player. And the combination of the figure of the second rotating body can be changed. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the same number of drive motors as that of the rotating body are required, which increases the cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means applies the driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the rotating state of the first rotating body is different from the rotating state of the second rotating body. Therefore, the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed even with one driving means. That is, the required number of driving means can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In addition, as a different rotation state of one rotating body and the other rotating body, for example, a state in which the rotating speeds of one rotating body and the other rotating body are different, and one rotating body is rotated while the other rotating body is rotated. A state in which the rotating body is stopped is exemplified. The rotational speed need not be constant, and may be increased or decreased.

  Moreover, as a some figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each rotary body, a character, a design, a color, a pattern, or these combinations are illustrated, for example. In this case, the graphic may be a part of a character or design (one that combines with another graphic to form one character or design), or all (only the graphic forms one character or design). Stuff).

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. A rotation period and the rotation period of a 2nd rotary body can be varied. Therefore, even if it is one drive means, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body and the figure of the 2nd rotary body which a player visually recognizes can be changed.

  Moreover, since the transmission means is configured to vary the rotation ratio of the rotation transmitted from the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the structure of the transmitting means can be simplified.

  Examples of the transmission means include a mechanism (gear transmission mechanism and chain transmission mechanism) that transmits rotation by meshing and a mechanism (friction transmission mechanism and belt transmission mechanism) that transmits rotation by friction. The gear transmission mechanism is a spur gear, worm and worm gear, bevel gear, or rack and pinion, the chain transmission mechanism is a chain and sprocket, the friction transmission mechanism is a friction gear, and the belt transmission mechanism is A pulley and a belt are illustrated respectively.

  In this case, the mechanism for transmitting the rotation with the above-described meshing between the rotation shaft of the first rotating body and the drive shaft of the driving means and between the rotation shaft of the second rotating body and the drive shaft of the driving means. Alternatively, a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided, and one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has its rotating shaft directly connected to the driving shaft of the driving means, and the first rotating body and A mechanism for transmitting rotation by meshing or a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be disposed between the other rotating shaft of the second rotating body and the driving shaft of the driving means. In the latter case, the number of parts (gears, etc.) for constituting a mechanism for transmitting rotation can be suppressed, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C2, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are in a state in which the other phase is shifted with respect to one phase at a visual recognition position where the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface is visible to the player. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by being stopped at

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the number of graphic combinations that can be displayed can be increased, and it is necessary to display a desired graphic combination. The number of rotations can be suppressed, and it can appear in a short time.

  That is, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at a visual recognition position where the player can visually recognize the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface, the two rotating bodies are requested to have the same phase. As the number of possible figures decreases, the number of revolutions required to reveal the desired combination of figures increases (the table lengthens). On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at the visual recognition position, the other phase is shifted from the one phase of both rotating bodies. Therefore, the number of combinations of figures that can be displayed can be increased, and the number of rotations required to display a desired combination of figures can be suppressed and the number of combinations can be displayed in a short time. it can.

  In this case, at least a part or all of the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are curved in a circular arc shape protruding outward in a cross-sectional view orthogonal to the rotation axis. Is preferred. Thereby, even when there is a phase shift between the first rotating body and the second rotating body stopped at the visual recognition position, it is difficult for the player to recognize the phase shift.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission means includes first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body, and second transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. And at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes at least two gears that can mesh with each other, and one of the two gears meshes with the other gear. And a non-engagement region that blocks transmission of rotation with non-engagement between the meshing region that transmits rotation and the other gear.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body, and the second transmission for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. At least one of the means includes at least two gears that can mesh with each other, and one of the two gears meshes with the other gear to transmit rotation and the other gear. A non-engagement region that interrupts transmission of rotation with non-engagement with the gear, so that one of the first and second rotating bodies is stopped while the other is rotated, and the first rotation A state in which both the body and the second rotating body are rotated can be formed. Therefore, even if it is one drive means, the combination of the figure of the 1st rotary body and the figure of the 2nd rotary body which a player visually recognizes can be changed.

  Further, in this way, the transmission means can rotate the other of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, stop one of the rotations, release the stop, and restart the rotation. The expectation of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figure of the rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body can be enhanced.

  Both the first transmission means and the second transmission means include at least two gears that can mesh with each other, and one of the two gears has a meshing region and a non-meshing region. May be provided. Thereby, it is possible to form a state where both the first rotating body and the second rotating body rotate, a state where both stop, a state where one stops and the other rotates, and a state where one rotates and the other stops. .

  In the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission unit or the second transmission unit includes a gear having the meshing region and the non-meshing region, and the formation range of the non-meshing region is the first rotating body or A gaming machine C5, which is set corresponding to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means includes the gear having the meshing area and the non-meshing area, so that the driving means is driven. In this state, one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is switched between rotation and stop, and the other is maintained in rotation. In this case, the formation range of the non-engagement region is set corresponding to the interval between the figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. The length of the table whose element is a combination with the figure of the second rotating body can be shortened. Therefore, the number of rotations of the first rotator and the second rotator required to reveal a desired combination of figures can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to shorten the time required for making a desired figure combination appear.

  In addition, the formation range of the non-engagement region is set corresponding to the interval between the plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface. One of the first rotation body and the second rotation body is determined by the non-engagement region. This means that the other is rotated by a rotation angle corresponding to the interval of n figures (n is an integer including 1) while stopped. In particular, it is preferable to set n = 1. This is because it is possible to minimize the number of revolutions necessary for making the desired table combination appear by minimizing the length of the table.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the transmission means transmits a rotation in the positive direction of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a positive direction of the driving means. A reverse direction transmission means for transmitting rotation in the opposite direction opposite to the first rotation body and the second rotation body, and when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, the forward rotation of the drive means The transmission to the direction transmission means is allowed, the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is interrupted, and when the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, the rotation of the drive means is transmitted to the forward direction transmission means. A gaming machine C6 comprising switching means for blocking and allowing transmission to the reverse direction transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction in the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the switching means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the forward direction transmitting means. When the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is permitted and the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, transmission of the rotation of the drive means to the forward direction transmission means is blocked by the switching means. In addition, since transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is allowed, the figure of the first rotating body and the second rotation that the player visually recognizes when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction and when rotated in the reverse direction. Different types of combinations with body figures. In other words, two types of tables having the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body as elements and changing to the rotation direction of the driving means can arbitrarily select these two types of tables. can do.

  As the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, the first structure described in the gaming machine C2 or C3 (structure in which the rotation ratio between the first rotating body and the second rotating body is different), the gaming machine C4 or The second structure described in C5 (a structure in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped by the non-engagement region), and the first structure in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are synchronously rotated at the same speed. Any one of the three structures can be selected.

  For example, a case where the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and the second structure is selected as the reverse direction transmission means is exemplified. Further, the same structure may be selected for the forward direction transmission unit and the reverse direction transmission unit. For example, when the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, the case where the second structure is selected is exemplified. In the former case, the rotation ratio is different between the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means. In the latter case, the meshing area and the non-meshing area are different between the forward direction transmission means and the backward direction transmission means. The formation ratio of is different. Even in this case, two types of tables having the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body as elements are selected, and the two types of tables can be arbitrarily selected by changing the rotation direction of the driving means. Can be possible.

  Further, the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction, and the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means are rotated in the reverse direction. May be in the same direction or in the opposite direction. However, the same direction is preferable. This is because it can be made difficult for the player to be aware that the table has been changed by changing the direction of rotation of the driving means.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the game machine includes light emitting means disposed in at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and an outer periphery of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine C7, wherein at least a part of the surface is formed of a light-transmitting material.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, since at least part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed of a light transmissive material, the first The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means disposed in at least one of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

  The light emitted from the light emitting means may be always emitted or may be emitted under a predetermined condition. As the predetermined condition, for example, when the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body form a specific combination, when one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is stopped, the stop For example, when rotation is resumed before or after stopping.

  In the gaming machine C7, the outer surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed in a box shape with the front surface opened and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated through the open portion of the front surface. A gaming machine C8, comprising a container that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the board.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the first rotation is formed through the open portion of the front surface, and the first rotation body and the second rotation body are accommodated while the front surface is formed in an open box shape. Since the player is provided with a container that allows the player to visually recognize the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the body and the second rotating body, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means. That is, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means in a different manner from the case where the light emitted from the light emitting means is directly visually recognized. For example, a mode in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the inner wall surface of the container and visually recognized by the player, or the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the wall portion of the container to irradiate a predetermined object. Examples include a mode in which a player visually recognizes a predetermined object, a mode in which light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the wall portion of the container, and a predetermined part (for example, an end surface of the front surface) of the container is emitted. The

  In addition, each said aspect, for example, the specific figure of the several figures drawn in at least one of the 1st rotary body or the 2nd rotary body is the back side (namely, the 1st rotary body or the 2nd rotary body). It is preferably executed when the player is placed at a position that is not visible to the player. A specific figure arranged at a position invisible to the player is associated with the player as the light emitting means emits light (the first rotary body or the second rotary body is placed so that the specific figure is visible). This is because it can be expected to be rotated). In particular, the light emission of the light emitting means is preferably executed in a state where at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is stopped.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C8, a storage body in which the first rotary body and the second rotary body are stored, an effect position and a game in which the first rotary body and the second rotary body can be visually recognized by the player. And a moving means for moving between a retreat position that cannot be visually recognized by a person.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the container in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are players. Since the moving means for moving between the effect position visible from the player and the retreat position not visible from the player is provided, a desired combination of the combination of the first rotary figure and the second rotary figure is selected. It can be made to appear promptly at the required timing.

  That is, in the present invention, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body relatively much in order to bring out a desired combination, and the time is increased. However, the moving means causes the first rotating body and the second rotating body to rotate. Since the body can be moved from the player to a retreat position that cannot be visually recognized, the first rotary body and the second rotary body can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotational position at the retreat position. When the required timing arrives, the moving means can move the first rotating body and the second rotating body to the effect position, and a desired combination can be quickly displayed.

  The gaming machine C9 is provided with operating means for executing a predetermined operation, and the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the operating means is operated at the retracted position. Characteristic gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated when they are arranged at the retracted position and the operating means is operated. When the body and the second rotating body are rotated in advance at the retracted position, the player can be prevented from being recognized by the player.

  That is, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even if the first rotating body and the player cannot be visually recognized by being moved to the retracted position, There is a possibility that the player may recognize the rotation by the sound generated by the rotation of the second rotating body. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C10, since the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be performed by being mixed into the operation of the operating means, it is difficult for the player to recognize such rotation. it can.

  Examples of the operation means include a payout device and a sound generation device. That is, in a state where the game medium is paid out by the payout device, a relatively loud sound is generated with the game medium payout operation. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body or the like. The same applies to the state where sound is generated from the sound generator. Alternatively, or in addition thereto, the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be rotated when a predetermined display is performed on the display device. Since the player's consciousness is concentrated on the predetermined display performed on the display device, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body or the like.

<About the concept of the invention taking LED 344 as an example>
A rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and at least a part of an outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, a light emitting means disposed in the rotating body, and the rotation In a gaming machine including a body that is rotatably accommodated and that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body through an open portion of the front surface, light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted from the rotating body. A gaming machine D1 in which light transmitted from an outer wall is reflected by the container and visually recognized by a player.

  Here, a rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a light emitting unit disposed inside the rotating body, 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a housing in which a rotating body is rotatably accommodated, and that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body from an open portion on the front surface of the housing (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013). -220215 gazette). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the light of the light emitting means passes through the outer wall of the rotating body viewed from the open portion of the front surface of the container and is only directly recognized by the player. There was a problem that the light effect was not effectively demonstrated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted from the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the container and visually recognized by the player, the light transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is The player can visually recognize the light in a mode different from the case of directly viewing, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body is formed of a light-transmitting material and a transmission portion that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and a material that can reflect light. And a reflecting part for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the inside of the rotating body, and the transmitting part and the reflecting part at the time of rotation of the rotating body define an irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting means. A gaming machine D2 that is allowed to pass.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, on the outer wall of the rotating body, a transmission part that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A reflecting portion that reflects the inside of the rotating body is formed, and the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion can pass through the irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting means when the rotating body rotates, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means And a form in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside. Can be switched with the rotation. That is, two light emission forms can be formed by only one light emitting means. For example, the position of light visually recognized by the player is switched to at least two places without adopting a structure in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is movable. be able to. As a result, it is possible to effectively exhibit the light effect while reducing the number of parts and simplifying the structure.

  In the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is disposed in a posture to irradiate light toward an open portion of the front surface of the container.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is arranged in a posture to irradiate light toward the open portion of the front surface of the container, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be emitted. In a mode in which the light is directly transmitted from the transmission part to the outside, the light can be made visible to the player from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located at the open part of the front surface of the container, while the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected. In a form in which the light is reflected by the part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside, the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is made invisible from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located at the open part of the front surface of the container. The player can visually recognize the rotating body. Thereby, along with the rotation of the rotating body, the position where the light is visually recognized can be switched, and the position where the light is visually recognized can be greatly different, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a substantially prismatic body having a substantially polygonal cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a prismatic body having a polygonal cross section, so that the apparent rotating body appears as the rotating body rotates. The diameter can be changed (increased or decreased). Therefore, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is visible to the player around the rotating body, the light is The size of the visually recognized area can be increased or decreased with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body juxtaposed in parallel with the first rotating body, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively A gaming machine D5, which is formed as a substantially triangular columnar body having a substantially triangular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged substantially parallel to the first rotating body. Since the rotator and the second rotator are each formed as a triangular prism having a triangular cross-section, the gap between the first rotator and the second rotator (with the rotation of the first rotator and the second rotator) ( The facing distance can be changed. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion, then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is transmitted from the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. When making a player visually recognize, the magnitude | size of the area | region where light is visually recognized can be increased / decreased with rotation of a rotary body, As a result, the effect effect of light can be exhibited effectively.

  In the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has the reflecting portion disposed on an inner surface of an outer wall that forms one outer surface of the outer surfaces of the substantially triangular cross section. A gaming machine D6, wherein the transmission portions are disposed on the respective outer walls forming the remaining two outer surfaces.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed on the inner surface of the outer wall that forms one outer surface of the outer surfaces having a substantially triangular cross section. Since the reflection part is provided and the transmission part is provided on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside. In this case, light can be transmitted to the outside from the two outer surfaces (transmission portions). Therefore,
The light can be reflected by two different locations on the inner wall surface of the container so as to be visually recognized by the player, or the light transmitted from one transmission part can be visually recognized by the player and transmitted from the other transmission part. Can be reflected by the inner wall surface of the container and made visible to the player, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D6, the container is formed in a box-like body whose front surface is open, and a reflection portion formed of a material capable of reflecting light is formed on the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body. A gaming machine D7, which is disposed in a range exceeding the outer shape of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the container is formed in a box-like body whose front surface is open, and the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body is made of a material that can reflect light. Since the reflection part to be formed is disposed in a range exceeding the outer shape of the first rotator and the second rotator, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted from the transmission part to the outside. Next, the player reflects the light reflected from the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body in the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body and around the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In addition, the light can be changed with the rotation of each rotating body, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D7, the container is capable of reflecting light to an inner wall surface on a side surface of the box-shaped body and facing in parallel to the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine D8, characterized in that a reflecting portion formed of a simple material is provided.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7, the container is an inner wall surface on the side surface of the box-shaped body, and faces the rotation axis of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in parallel. Since the inner wall surface is provided with a reflecting portion made of a material that can reflect light, the light reflected by the inner wall surface on the back side of the container is further reflected by the inner wall surface on the side surface and visually recognized by the player. In addition, the light transmitted from the transmission part can be reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface of the container and made visible to the player. As a result, the light effect can be effectively exhibited.

<Concept of Invention Taking First Rotating Body 10340 as an Example>
A rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and a part of an outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, light emitting means disposed inside the rotating body, and the rotating body And a storage body that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary body through an open portion of the front surface. A gaming machine E1 in which a rotating body is accommodated, and one of the pair of rotating bodies has a rotating shaft intersecting with the other rotating body.

  Here, a rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a light emitting unit disposed inside the rotating body, 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a housing in which a rotating body is rotatably accommodated, and that allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body from an open portion on the front surface of the housing (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013). -2021515). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the effect of creating a graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body is not effectively exhibited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least a pair of rotating bodies is accommodated in the container, and one rotating body of the pair of rotating bodies intersects with the other rotating body. Therefore, a plurality of directions in which the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotator moves can be provided, so that the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotator can be improved.

  In addition, as an aspect which crosses a pair of rotary body, the case where the rotating shaft of a pair of rotary body crosses at right angle is illustrated. In this case, for example, when the container is formed in a rectangular box shape, the light irradiated in the axial diameter direction from the light emitting means of one rotating body is angled on the side surface on which the rotating shaft of one rotating body is supported. However, only the light emitted from the light emitting means of the other rotating body is reflected and is visually recognized by the player. That is, the surface of the container that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means of one rotating body and the surface of the container that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means of the other rotating body can be separated. it can.

  In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted from the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the container and visually recognized by the player.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted from the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the container and visually recognized by the player, so that the light is directly emitted from the open portion of the front surface of the rotating body. The player can visually recognize the light in a mode different from the case of visual recognition, and among the side surfaces of the container, not only the side surface facing the outer peripheral surface of one rotary body but also the side surface supporting one rotary body. It can be used as a part that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means of the rotating body. Thereby, the location where the light emitted from the light emitting means is visually recognized inside the container can be increased, and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body can be viewed brightly. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the length of the one rotating body in the axial direction is made longer than the length of the other rotating body in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the one rotating body and the other rotating body The lengths perpendicular to the axis are equal, and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body is reflected on the portion of the inner surface of the container facing the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body. A mirror-like reflecting member is provided, and a length visually recognized by combining the reflecting member and the other rotating body is equal to that of the one rotating body in the axial direction of the one rotating body. A gaming machine E3.

  Here, in the case where the rotating shafts of the pair of rotating bodies are accommodated in the container so as to intersect at right angles, the length of one rotating body in the direction of the rotating shaft and the length of the other rotating body in the direction perpendicular to the axis are matched. The width of the pair of rotating bodies (the dimension along the axial direction of one rotating body) can be matched. However, for example, when one of the rotating bodies is longer in the axial direction than the length in the direction perpendicular to the axis, the length in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the other rotating body is longer than the length in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the one rotating body. Since it becomes longer, there is a problem in that the other rotating body protrudes more in the axial direction than the one rotating body, and the container becomes larger.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the axial length of one rotating body is longer than the length of the other rotating body in the direction perpendicular to the axis. In this case, since the lengths of the one rotating body and the other rotating body in the direction perpendicular to the axis are equal, the dimension of the other rotating body in the axial radial direction is the same as the dimension of the one rotating body in the axial radial direction. The size of the container can be suppressed. In addition, a mirror-like reflecting member that reflects a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body is disposed in a portion facing the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body in the inner side surface of the container, and the reflecting member And the length visually recognized together with the other rotating body is equal to that of the one rotating body in the axial direction of the one rotating body, so that the discontinuity between the pair of rotating bodies can be made inconspicuous.

  In this case, among the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body, the portion that is not directly visible from the front, that is, the portion that is copied to the reflecting member, An effect without a sense of incongruity can be performed by being visually recognized integrally with the portion facing the front surface of the container. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body.

  Further, in this case, the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body viewed through the reflecting members arranged on the left and right of the other rotating body is visually recognized as rotating with the rotation of the other rotating body. Therefore, it can be visually recognized as if another rotating body is connected to the left and right of the other rotating body.

  In the gaming machine E3, the reflecting member includes a pair of side reflecting members disposed on a pair of side walls facing the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body with respect to the other rotating body. The game machine E4 is characterized in that the boundary of the side reflection member is formed on the back side of the other rotating body, and the boundary is invisible to the player.

  Here, when the reflecting member is formed of a plurality of mirrors arranged continuously at a predetermined angular interval around the other rotating body, the figure visually recognized through the mirror is different from the difference in the angle of the mirror. It is visually recognized in a mode of being cut at the boundary between adjacent mirrors. Therefore, there is a sense of incongruity when a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body viewed through the reflecting member and a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of one rotating body and viewed directly by the player are simultaneously viewed. growing.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member is disposed on the pair of side walls facing the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body with respect to the other rotating body. A pair of side reflection members are formed, and the boundary between the pair of side reflection members is formed on the back side of the other rotating body, and the boundary is made invisible to the player. It can prevent that the figure visually recognized is cut | disconnected by the boundary between side reflecting members. Thereby, the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body as a single board figure can be visually recognized on the entire surface of the side reflecting member, and the player is drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the one rotating body. It is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity when viewed simultaneously with a figure that is directly visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body.

  In the gaming machine E4, a partition plate that does not transmit visible light is disposed between the pair of rotating bodies so as to partition the internal space of the container, and the partition plate can rotate the other rotating body. The gaming machine E5 is provided with a support portion for supporting the partition plate, and an auxiliary support portion for supporting the partition plate is provided.

  Here, a partition plate may be disposed between the pair of rotating bodies for the purpose of preventing a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of rotating bodies visually recognized through the reflecting member from being mixed. On the stage of production, it is preferable that the narrower the distance between the pair of rotating bodies, the easier it is to produce an effect of making the pair of rotating bodies visible together, and the partition plate is made thinner. On the other hand, the partition plate can also support the rotating body. In this case, it is preferable that the partition plate is thick in terms of strength. Thus, the partition plate has a problem that conflicts when setting its thickness.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the partition plate is supported by the auxiliary support portion, so that the rigidity of the partition plate can be improved. Thereby, the thickness can be suppressed and the space | interval between a pair of rotary body can be narrowed, keeping the intensity | strength which utilizes a partition plate as a supporting member of the other rotary body. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body.

  Although it does not specifically limit as an auxiliary | assistant support part, A reflection member can be utilized. That is, by forming the reflecting member between the partition plate and the side surface of the container, the reflecting member reflects the picture drawn on the outer peripheral surface of another rotating body, and the rigidity of the partition plate is increased. It can also be used for improving the function. Thereby, the separate member for improving the rigidity of a partition plate can be made unnecessary.

  The gaming machine E6 according to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, wherein the container is rotatable about an axis parallel to a rotation axis of at least one of the pair of rotating bodies.

  Here, in the case where one rotating body and the other rotating body are rotated in different rotational states, the phases of both rotating bodies coincide when stopping one rotating body and the other rotating body. Is required, the number of figures that can be combined is reduced, and the number of rotations required to display a desired combination of figures is increased (the table is lengthened).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the container can rotate around an axis parallel to the rotation axis of at least one of the pair of rotating bodies. Therefore, when at least one of the pair of rotating bodies stops at a predetermined angle with respect to the front surface of the container, the container is rotated in the opposite direction by the inclination angle. Therefore, it is possible to absorb the phase shift when one of the rotating bodies is stopped, and to make a desired combination of figures appear at a low number of rotations.

  In addition, since the container is formed so as to be rotatable, for example, by rotating the angle in the rotation direction of the other rotating body, the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body is changed and visually recognized. By attaching a lenticular or the like (a member that can change a figure that is visually recognized according to an angle formed with the line of sight) to the outer peripheral surface, it is possible to increase the figures that are visible when the rotating body is stopped.

  In the gaming machine E6, the gaming machine E7 is characterized in that a rotating shaft of the container is arranged along a direction in which the pair of rotating bodies are arranged in series.

  According to the gaming machine E7, since the rotation shaft of the container is arranged along the direction in which the pair of rotating bodies are arranged in a row, it is possible to easily suppress the rotation radius of the container.

  In the gaming machine E7, a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body is opened in a portion of the side wall of the container facing the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body so as to be visible to the player. A gaming machine E8, wherein a side opening portion is formed.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E7, the figure drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body is played on the portion of the side wall of the container facing the outer circumferential surface of the other rotating body. Since the side opening portion that is opened so as to be visible to the player is formed, it is possible to produce an effect using the side surface of the container that is not visible to the player before the container is rotated.

  When the container rotates and the container is viewed from the side, one of the rotating bodies is oriented with the rotation axis facing the player side, and the outer peripheral surface becomes invisible, so when determining the stop position of the rotating body Therefore, the stop position may be determined only by the other rotating body. Therefore, for example, when a series of symbols is formed at a stop position of a pair of rotating bodies accommodated in a plurality of storage bodies on the left and right sides, the degree of freedom of the stop position of the rotating body (anywhere on the rotary table) Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body.

  In any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the gaming machine E9 is characterized in that the rotating shaft of the container and the rotating shaft of the other rotating body are formed coaxially.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the rotation axis of the container and the rotation axis of the other rotating body are formed coaxially, so that the inclination of the stop position can be reduced. It is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity that the player feels when canceling with the rotation of.

  For example, when the rotation axis of the container is displaced in the left-right direction of the rotation axis of the other rotor, the center axis that has been viewed by the player as the center axis of the rotation locus of the other rotor, and the container The rotation of the other rotating body deviates from the axis when the other rotating body moves, so that it becomes easier for the player to feel that rotation other than the rotation about the rotation axis of the other rotating body has occurred in the other rotating body.

  On the other hand, if the rotation axis of the other rotator and the rotation axis of the container are coaxial, the rotation axis of the other rotator due to the rotation of the container is also used as the central axis of the rotation locus of the other rotator until then. Since it is the same as the central axis visually recognized by the player, it becomes easier for the player to feel that the rotation caused by the rotation of the container is merely the rotation of the other rotating body. That is, even after one rotating body stops, the player can feel that the other rotating body continues to rotate, and when the tilt of the stop position is canceled by the rotation of the container, It is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort that a person feels.

  In any one of the gaming machines E6 to E9, a back side member and a connecting member that connects the back side member and the container are provided, and the container rotates one end in the direction of its own rotation axis. The connecting member connects the intermediate portion in the rotation axis direction of the container and the back side member, and the back side member follows an arc centered on the rotation axis of the container. A gaming machine E10 that is formed from different shapes.

  Here, when the container is pivotally supported at both ends in the rotation axis direction, a stopper for stopping the rotation of the container is placed in the vicinity of one pivot support position, and when the container is restricted from rotating by the stopper. In addition, it is difficult to suppress the flow of the container in the vicinity of the other axial position due to the inertia, because of the length of the container in the direction of the rotation axis, and it is necessary to dispose stoppers at both axial support positions. . In this case, if the timing at which the container comes into contact with the pair of stoppers is deviated, the container may vibrate at the stop position, and the effect of rendering the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body can be effectively exhibited. There was a problem of disappearing. On the other hand, pivotal support of the container at the intermediate portion can be achieved by inserting the pivot support part into the internal space of the container, but this has the problem that the arrangement area of the rotating body is narrowed. It was.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E6 to E9, the gaming machine E10 includes a back side member and a connecting member that connects the back side member and the housing, Since one end is pivotally supported, the intermediate portion is connected to the back side member formed from the shape along the circle around the rotation axis of the container by the connecting member. The space | interval of the axial support position of a container can be narrowed, ensuring space. Thereby, since the number of the stoppers which stop rotation of a container can be suppressed, it can suppress that a container vibrates in a stop position. Therefore, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body.

  In any one of the gaming machines E8 to E10, in a state where the open part of the container faces the front, the side open part is not visible by the reflecting member, and the side open part of the container is the front. In the state of facing, the gaming machine E11 is characterized in that the other rotating body can be seen through the side opening portion.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E8 to E10, in a state where the open part of the container faces the front, the side open part is not visible by the reflecting member, and the side of the container In the state where the side opening part faces the front, the other rotating body is visible through the side opening part, so that the side wall part of the housing body can be visually recognized through the side opening part and the side reflection. This can be used for both the effect of visually recognizing the rotating body through the member.

  In addition, when the open part faces the front, the side open part is not visible, and when the side open part faces the front, the reflecting member can be viewed vertically through the side open part. Examples include a mode of moving left and right and retracting outside the range occupied by the side opening portion, a mode of using a magic mirror, and the like.

  In the gaming machine E11, the reflecting member includes a pair of side reflecting members disposed on a pair of side walls facing the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body with respect to the other rotating body. The boundary of the side reflecting member is formed on the back side of the other rotating body in a state where the open portion faces the front, the boundary is invisible to the player, and the side open portion faces the front The side reflection member disposed on the side far from the side opening portion of the pair of side reflection members slides along the wall surface of the container as the container rotates. The gaming machine E12 is characterized in that the posture is changed to a posture facing the front as the slide portion slides.

  Here, when the side reflecting member is arranged on the back side of the other rotating body so that the player cannot visually recognize the side reflecting member, when the side reflecting member is viewed from the side opening portion, the other rotating body The reflective member is visually recognized at different inclination angles on the left and right sides. For this reason, the appearance of the pattern becomes asymmetrical, and a sense of incongruity occurs. On the other hand, in the arrangement in which the reflecting member is symmetric in the side view (the reflecting member extends along the front-rear direction), the boundary between the reflecting members is conspicuous, and the effect of rendering the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body is effective It will be difficult to demonstrate.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E12, the reflecting member includes a pair of side reflecting members disposed on a pair of side walls facing the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body with respect to the other rotating body. The boundary between the pair of side reflecting members is made invisible to the player by being formed on the back side of the other rotating body in the state where the open part faces the front, and in the state where the side open part faces the front, Of the pair of side reflection members, the side reflection member disposed on the side far from the side opening portion includes a slide part that slides on the side wall of the container as the container rotates, and the slide part As the slide moves, the posture is changed to a posture facing the front.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E11, the effect of rendering the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body is effective by making the boundary of the reflecting member invisible when the open part faces the front. In the state where the side opening portion is facing the front, the size of the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the other rotating body copied to the reflecting member is made equal on the left and right of the other rotating body. It is possible to suppress the uncomfortable feeling felt by the player who visually recognizes the reflecting member.

<An example of the technical idea of providing two transmission paths FL1, FL2>
A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface. In the gaming machine that allows the player to visually recognize the figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the transmission means is different in the rotating state of the first rotating body and the rotating state of the second rotating body. Thus, forward transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means in the forward direction to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and rotation of the driving means in the opposite direction opposite to the forward direction to the predetermined member A reverse transmission means for transmitting, and when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, the rotation of the drive means is allowed to be transmitted to the forward direction transmission means and the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is blocked. And the drive means is rotated in the opposite direction. Gaming machine F1, characterized in that it comprises the a switching means for allowing the transmission to the reverse transmitting means together with blocking the transmission to the forward direction transmission means of the rotation of the driving means, to if.

  Here, a first rotating body and a second rotating body having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are provided, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated to be drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body. There is known a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body (see JP 2013-220215 A). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that driving means are required for each rotating body, and the cost increases accordingly.

  Therefore, in addition to the above-described gaming machine, the applicant of the present application is a gaming machine provided with transmission means for transmitting the driving force of one driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the respective rotating states are different. Developed (not known at the time of filing this application). However, in this case, the production by the first rotating body and the second rotating body is limited to two modes in which one driving means rotates forward and backward, and the two modes reverse the time series in the rotation. Therefore, there is a problem that the change in performance by the first rotating body and the second rotating body is scarce and the production is simplified.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the transmission means rotates the driving means in the positive direction so that the rotation state of the first rotation body and the rotation state of the second rotation body are different. In the case where the forward direction transmission means for transmitting to the two-rotor, the reverse direction transmission means for transmitting the rotation in the opposite direction opposite to the forward direction of the drive means to the predetermined member, and the drive means rotated in the forward direction Transmission of the rotation of the drive means to the forward direction transmission means is permitted, transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is interrupted, and when the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, the forward direction transmission of the rotation of the drive means is transmitted. Switching means for interrupting transmission to the means and allowing transmission to the reverse direction transmission means, so that the driving force is supplied to the first rotating body and the second rotating body by two driving paths with one driving means. Or it can transmit to a predetermined member. Thereby, the effects of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be complicated without increasing the number of driving means.

  In addition, as the predetermined member, a shielding member capable of forming a lighting member disposed on the rotating shaft of the rotating body or a state of covering the open part of the front surface of the container in which the rotating body is accommodated and a state of retracting from the open part. Examples thereof include a member, a thin plate member which is a member which is rotatable about the longitudinal direction and is continuously provided in the width direction and which constitutes the wall surface of the container. The predetermined member may be a first rotating body and a second rotating body.

  In the gaming machine F1, the predetermined member is formed of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and the forward direction transmitting means and the backward direction transmitting means are different in structure from the forward direction transmitting means. The gaming machine F2, wherein the rotation state of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are different between when the driving force is transmitted and when the driving force is transmitted from the reverse direction transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the figure of the first rotating body visually recognized by the player and the case where the driving means are rotated in the forward direction and in the reverse direction are displayed. The type of combination with the figure of the two-rotor body can be varied.

  As the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, the first structure described in the gaming machine C2 or C3 (structure in which the rotation ratio between the first rotating body and the second rotating body is different), the gaming machine C4 or The second structure described in C5 (a structure in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped by the non-engagement region), and a third structure that synchronously rotates the first rotating body and the second rotating body at the same speed. Any one of the structure and the fourth structure for rotating only one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be selected.

  For example, a case where the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and the second structure is selected as the reverse direction transmission means is exemplified. Further, the same structure may be selected for the forward direction transmission unit and the reverse direction transmission unit. For example, when the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, the case where the second structure is selected is exemplified. In the former case, the rotation ratio is different between the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means. In the latter case, the meshing area and the non-meshing area are different between the forward direction transmission means and the backward direction transmission means. The formation ratio of is different. This also makes it possible to select two types of tables by changing the rotation direction of the driving means by using two types of tables, each of which has a combination of a graphic of the first rotary body and a graphic of the second rotary body. Can be possible.

  Further, the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction, and the rotation direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving means are rotated in the reverse direction. May be in the same direction or in the opposite direction. However, the same direction is preferable. This is because it can be made difficult for the player to be aware that the table has been changed by changing the direction of rotation of the driving means.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, at least a part of the transmission means is formed so as to protrude inward from at least one axial end of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. Machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, at least a part of the transmission means is formed to protrude inward from at least one axial end of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. Therefore, in the axial direction of the rotating body, the axial length of the rotating body and the length of at least a part of the transmitting means can be partially canceled, and the first rotating body, the second rotating body and the transmitting means are arranged. The space to be performed can be suppressed in the axial direction of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, one of the forward direction transmitting means and the backward direction transmitting means is disposed at one end in the axial direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and the forward direction transmitting means and The gaming machine F4, wherein the other of the reverse direction transmission means is disposed at the other axial end of the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

  Here, when the transmission means is formed in two ways, a forward direction transmission means and a reverse direction transmission means, if they are arranged at one end in the axial direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the two ways Therefore, a partition plate for partitioning the transmission means is required, which increases the member cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, one of the forward direction transmitting means and the backward direction transmitting means is one end in the axial direction of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. Since the other of the forward direction transmission means and the backward direction transmission means is disposed at the other axial end of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are disposed. The body can be utilized as a member that partitions the forward direction transmission means and the backward direction transmission means, and it is not necessary to additionally provide a partition plate.

  The gaming machine F4 includes a housing for housing the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the transmission means, and at least a part of a transmission path that connects the forward direction transmission means and the backward direction transmission means. The gaming machine F5 is formed in at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

  Here, when the transmission path of the transmission means increases, it becomes necessary to add a transmission shaft for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to each transmission path, and an empty space inside the container is compressed, and the container is enlarged. There may be a need.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, the gaming machine F5 includes a housing body that houses the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the transmitting means, and is a forward direction transmitting means or a backward direction transmitting means Is formed in at least one of the first rotator and the second rotator, so that an empty space inside the container (the volume of the rotator is reduced from the inner space of the container). It is possible to suppress the space (excluding the space) from being compressed in the transmission path, and to suppress the size of the container.

  In any one of the gaming machines F2 to F5, the gaming machine F6 includes a stopping unit that stops the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving unit is stopped. .

  Here, in the case where the driving force is transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the forward direction transmitting means and the backward direction transmitting means, for example, when the driving force transmission by the forward direction transmitting means is canceled, the backward direction When the transmission path of the transmission means is in a sliding state (for example, a state where the gear is not engaged), the first rotating body and the second rotating body are not stopped, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are not stopped. There was a problem that the operation was hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F6, any one of the gaming machines F2 to F5 includes a stopping unit that stops the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the driving unit is stopped. Therefore, regardless of the state of the forward direction transmission means or the reverse direction transmission means when the driving means is stopped, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be stopped along with the stopping of the driving means, The operations of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be improved.

  The gaming machine F1 includes a light emitting means that is disposed inside at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body and emits light in a radial direction of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine, wherein at least a part of an outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the predetermined member is formed of the light emitting means. F7.

  Here, after the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are changed until the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated again. The first rotating body and the second rotating body could not be fully utilized as a production part.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body disposed in at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. Light emitting means for emitting light in the radial direction of the first rotating body and at least part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the predetermined member is formed of the light emitting means. Therefore, the state of the light emitting means can be changed by rotating the driving means in the reverse direction. Thus, after the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped and before the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated again, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are sufficient as an effect part. It can be used for.

  In addition, as an aspect in which the state of the light emitting means changes, the player visually recognizes the light emitted from the light emitting means by rotating a rotating body that includes a portion that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means and a shielding portion. Examples include a mode of switching between a possible state and an invisible state, and a mode of changing the light emission direction of the light viewed through the rotating body when viewed from the front by rotating the light emitting means around the axis of the rotating body. .

  In the gaming machine F7, a shaft member disposed coaxially with at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body and configured to transmit a driving force from the driving means, and the shaft member Biasing means for biasing in a direction to maintain a predetermined posture, the light emitting means is disposed on the shaft member, and the reverse direction transmission means has a transmission state for transmitting a driving force to the shaft member; And a non-transmission state in which transmission of driving force to the shaft member is blocked.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F7, the light emitting means is provided and the light emitting means is provided along with the rotation axis of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A shaft member configured to transmit the driving force; and a biasing unit that biases the shaft member in a direction to maintain the shaft member in a predetermined posture. The reverse direction transmission unit transmits the driving force to the shaft member. Since the transmission state and the non-transmission state in which the transmission of the driving force to the shaft member is blocked are formed, the light emitting means can be swung by the driving force transmission only in one direction (reverse direction). Therefore, the effects of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be complicated.

  In the gaming machine F1, a shielding state that covers the front surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body and makes the first rotating body and the second rotating body invisible, and the first rotating body and the first rotating body A shield member that is retracted from the front surface of the two-rotor body and forms a retracted state in which the first and second rotor bodies are visible, and a biasing force that generates a biasing force that biases the shield member in one direction. And a locking member formed to be able to lock the shielding member in the shielding state, and the predetermined member is formed from the shielding member, and the driving force of the driving means by the reverse direction transmission means Is transmitted to the shielding member, so that the shielding member is moved toward the shielding state, and the urging force of the urging means is generated in a direction to move the shielding member toward the retracted state. A game characterized by F9.

  Here, by forming the shielding member that makes the first rotating body and the second rotating body invisible, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated in the shielding state, and the shielding member Although the number of rotations of the first rotating body and the second rotating body required to reveal a desired combination of figures after entering the retracted state can be suppressed, additional driving means for driving the shielding member is required. There was a problem of becoming.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the predetermined member is formed from the shielding member, so that the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the shielding member by the reverse direction transmission means. Since the shielding member can be moved in one direction (direction toward the shielding state), an additional driving means for driving the shielding member can be eliminated. In addition, the locking member can be locked in the shielding state by the locking member, and the shielding member can be moved toward the retracted state by the urging force by releasing the locking by the locking member. The first rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated while the member is kept in the shielded state. Accordingly, the number of rotations of the first rotating body and the second rotating body required to bring out a desired combination of figures after the shielding member is in the retracted state is suppressed while suppressing the number of driving means disposed. Can do.

  In the gaming machine F9, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the locking member via the shielding member, the locking member is in a locked state in which the shielding member is locked in the shielding state. And a game machine F10 that is switched to a release state in which the locking is released.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F9, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the locking member via the shielding member, so that the state of the locking member changes the shielding member to the shielding state. Since it can be switched between a locked state for locking and a released state for releasing the locking, an additional member for changing the state of the locking member can be eliminated, and shielding when changing the state of the locking member is possible. A detection device for detecting the position of the member can be dispensed with. Therefore, the shielding member can be locked and unlocked while suppressing the addition of the member.

  In the gaming machine F9 or F10, the shielding member shields at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in an invisible state in the shielding state.

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F9 or F10, the shielding member shields at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in an invisible state in the shielding state, Even when the rotating body is visible, the relationship between the rotational states of the first rotating body and the second rotating body cannot be grasped, and therefore both the first rotating body and the second rotating body are shielded. The same effect can be achieved. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement position of the shielding member in the shielding state can be increased.

  In the gaming machine F1, by including a plurality of plate members arranged continuously on the back side of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the surfaces of the plurality of plate members are directed to the front, The rear of the plate member is made invisible by the shielding state in which the rear of the plate member is shielded invisible and the normal of the surfaces of the plurality of plate members are directed in a direction parallel to the liquid crystal display device. A gaming state in which the predetermined member is formed of the plurality of plate members.

  Here, the first rotating body is arranged on the back side of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a plate member capable of switching between a shielded state in which the rear is not visible and a visible state in which the rear is visible can be arranged. The rotation of the second rotating body and the surface of the plate member itself are visually recognized together with the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body and the rear portion of the plate member. Although it is possible to switch between effects, there is a problem that additional drive means for rotating the plate member is necessary.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the predetermined device is formed of a plurality of plate members, so that a driving force for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body is generated. The plate member can be rotated using the driving force of the driving means. Accordingly, it is possible to produce an effect of changing the state of the portion visually recognized behind the first rotating body and the second rotating body while suppressing the number of driving units.

  In the gaming machine F12, the surface of the plate member is formed so as to be able to reflect light, and the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the plate member are formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device And a retracted position that is a position moved from the protruding position toward the outside of the liquid crystal display device, and at least the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the plate member are retracted. The gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the surface of the plate member is formed so as to be inclined toward the center front of the gaming area when arranged at the position.

  According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F12, the surface of the plate member is formed so as to be able to reflect light, and the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the plate member are located between the extended position and the retracted position. Since the surface of the plate member can be tilted toward the center front of the game area when it is moved between and disposed at least at the retracted position, the plate member is in the state where the plate member is disposed at the extended position. The light is reflected to the player side by reflecting the light toward the front and the surface of the plate member is directed toward the center front of the game area when the plate member is disposed at the retracted position. It can be tilted to reflect light to the player side. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the first rotating body, the second rotating body, and the plate member, the light reflected by the plate member can be directed to the player side.

  As a method for transmitting the driving force of the plurality of plate members, there are a method of forming gears at the tips of the plate members and meshing them with each other, a method of forming gears at the tips of the plate members and meshing with the rack gear, etc. Illustrated.

<An example of a technical idea using the figure changing member RK12>
A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface. In a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body, and the rotational direction in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are visually recognized on the outer peripheral surface. A gaming machine G1 comprising a figure changing member that changes a figure that is visually recognized along with the angle.

  Here, the driving means, the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, the first rotating body rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmission means and having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface, and the first rotating body A two-rotary body is provided, and the first and second rotary bodies are rotated to play a graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotary body and a graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotary body, respectively. A gaming machine that is visually recognized by a person is known (see JP 2013-220215 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the figure is visible to the player when the rotating body is stopped, and combinations of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are limited. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are provided on the outer peripheral surface with a figure changing member that changes the figure that is visually recognized along with the angle of the rotational direction that is visually recognized. The figures visually recognized on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be changed to a plurality of different figures depending on the viewing angle even on the same face, and the number of figures that can be combined can be increased.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are formed as a substantially triangular prismatic body having a substantially triangular cross section, and the figure changing member is a surface of each of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The shape of the first rotating body is changed when viewed from the normal direction of the first rotating body and when viewed in the direction facing the top of the triangle of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. And when viewed in a direction facing the top of the triangle of the second rotating body, the visually recognized figure is a figure related to a pair of surfaces adjacent to the top. .

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are formed as a substantially triangular prismatic body having a substantially triangular cross section, and the graphic change member is the first rotating body and the first rotating body. The figure visually recognized is changed when viewed from the normal direction of each surface of the two-rotor and when viewed in the direction opposite to the tops of the triangles of the first and second rotors. In the case of being visually recognized in the direction facing the triangular tops of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the visually recognized figure is a figure related to a pair of surfaces adjacent to the top, so the first rotating body and The stop position can be configured not only when each surface stops in front, but also when the top is arranged in front, while the second rotating body is a triangular prism. Thereby, the number of combinations of stop positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be increased from the square of 3 to the square of 6.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are formed as a substantially triangular prismatic body having a substantially triangular cross section and are rotated at different rotation ratios, and the figure changing member includes the first rotating body and the first rotating body. When the second rotating body is stopped in a state where the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body is visible to the player in a state where the phase of one rotating body is shifted from the phase of the other rotating body Moreover, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the figure visually recognized by the phase shift changes in a manner equivalent to the figure visually recognized when the phases match.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated at different rotation ratios, and the phase of one rotating body is different from the phase of the other rotating body. When stopped in a shifted state, the figure that is visually recognized by the phase shift changes in a manner that is the same as the figure that is visually recognized when the phase is matched, so that the phase is shifted and stopped. Can be difficult.

  At this time, since the inclination of the first rotating body and the second rotating body with respect to the front view is slight (preferably, 12 degrees or less), the player is as if the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped. It can be visually recognized that the postures match (no phase shift has occurred), and the effect of production can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machine G4, wherein the first rotating body and the second rotating body move in the axial direction of the respective rotating shafts.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the first rotating body and the second rotating body move in the axial direction of the respective rotating shafts, thereby Since the angle of the player with respect to the rotating body can be changed while the rotation is stopped, the figure visually recognized by the rotating body can be changed.

  For example, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are formed with a rotation axis in the left-right direction and moved downward from the upper position, the figure that is visually recognized at the upper position is extended vertically as it goes downward. By forming the figure changing member in such a manner that is visually recognized, it is possible to alleviate a sense of incongruity (difference in vertical dimension) when the surface is viewed obliquely.

  In the gaming machine G4, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are movable between an upper position formed at least above the gaming area and a lower position formed below the upper position. When the first rotating body and the second rotating body are disposed at the lower position, the rotation stop position of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is set at the upper position. And a normal line of a surface that is visually recognized as compared with a stop position of rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when the second rotating body is arranged. Gaming machine G5.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the normal lines of the first rotating body and the second rotating body at the stop position can be obtained by arranging the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the game area. The direction is changed to the player's line of sight (for example, if it is placed at the lower position, it will be looked down by the player, so it is formed upward), so the player's line of sight and each rotating body Even if the angle formed by the surface changes with the first and second rotating bodies moving up and down, the amount of change can be cancelled. Thereby, the discomfort felt by the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G4, when the surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are disposed at the visual recognition position, the player can visually recognize the movement of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the surface to be played is rotated in the direction opposite to the moving direction.

  According to the gaming machine G6, when the surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are arranged at the visual recognition position, the surface visually recognized by the player as the first rotating body and the second rotating body move. Is rotated in the direction opposite to the moving direction, it is possible to suppress changes in the angle formed between the surfaces of the first and second rotating bodies and the player's line of sight. It can suppress that the figure visually recognized with a movement of a rotary body changes.

  In any of the gaming machines G4 to G6, the rotation shafts of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are juxtaposed in the axial radial direction, and the first rotating body is centered on the rotating shaft of the second rotating body. A gaming machine G7 that is configured to be swingable.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in any of the gaming machines G4 to G6, the rotation shafts of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are juxtaposed in the axial direction, and the first rotating body is rotated by the second rotating body. Since it can swing around the shaft, even when the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped, the player can swing the first rotating body with respect to the second rotating body, thereby Correction of the angle of the outer peripheral surface of each rotating body to be visually recognized and changing the length of the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be performed. .

  As an effect of changing the length of the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, for example, the first rotating body is shortened by shortening the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. This makes it difficult to understand the breaks between the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body, and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are visually recognized as a unit. There is an effect that can be made.

  Further, by increasing the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, for example, a reflecting member such as a mirror is arranged on the back side of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and the first rotating body and When the second rotating body is copied, the reflecting member can be easily seen from between the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F14, and G1 to G7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F14, and G1 to G7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine K2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F14, and G1 to G7, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine K3 characterized by being. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 16a Flat glass (transparent plate)
112a Ball launch unit (operation means)
133 Dispensing device (operation means)
226 Audio output device (operation means)
320 Drive motor (moving means)
330 Housing (displacement member)
330, 6330, 7330, 8330, 9330, 10330, 11330, 13330, 14330 Housing 335a Opening (open part)
340a, 7340a, 8340a, 10340, 11340a, 12340a, 13340a First rotating body (displacement member, rotating body)
340b, 6340b, 7340b, 8340b, 11340b, 12340b, 13340b Second rotating body (displacement member, rotating body)
343A 1st display board (wall part)
343B 2nd display board (wall part)
343C 3rd display board (wall part)
344 LED (light emitting means)
350 Drive motor (drive means)
351 Drive gear (transmission means, first transmission means, second transmission means)
352 transmission gear (transmission means, first transmission means, second transmission means)
353, 2353, 3353 First gear (transmission means, first transmission means, second transmission means)
354, 2354, 3354 Intermediate gear (transmission means, second transmission means)
355, 2355, 3355 Second gear (transmission means, second transmission means)
430, 4430 Arm body (displacement member)
433, 4449 Connecting pin (pin part)
435 Drive motor (drive means)
440, 4440 First member (displacement member, second displacement member)
441a, 4439 Sliding groove 441 Base body (main body)
442 Front body (main body)
444 Arm member (driven part)
445 Drive motor (second drive means)
530 Displacement member (second displacement member)
600 Left / right sensor device (sensor device)
610 First sensor 620 Second sensor 6330a Electromagnetic solenoid (stopping means)
8333b Winding device (biasing means)
8335b Locking device (locking member)
8380 Shielding device (shielding member)
9381 Rotating plate member (plate member)
10331b Lower intermediate plate (partition plate)
10331e Guide extension (connecting member)
10331RF Reflecting member 10331RF1 Extension part (a part of slide part)
10331RF2 Rack gear part (part of slide part)
10331RFR Right reflective member (side reflective member)
10331RFL Left reflective member (side reflective member)
10333b Rectangular window (side open part)
10370 Arc plate member (back member)
CS1 Torsion spring (biasing means)
FL1 first transmission path (forward transmission means)
FL2 Second transmission path (reverse direction transmission means)
RK12, RK13 figure changing member Y1 first meshing region (meshing region)
Y2 Second toothing area (toothing area)
X1 first non-engagement region (non-engagement region)
X2 Second non-engagement region (non-engagement region)

Claims (3)

A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface. And a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize the figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body,
The transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means in the positive direction to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the rotating state of the first rotating body is different from the rotating state of the second rotating body. A transmission means;
Reverse direction transmission means for transmitting rotation in a reverse direction opposite to the forward direction of the drive means to a predetermined member;
When the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, the rotation of the drive means is allowed to be transmitted to the forward direction transmission means and the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is blocked, and the drive means is in the reverse direction. And a switching means for interrupting transmission of rotation of the driving means to the forward direction transmission means and allowing transmission to the reverse direction transmission means when rotated. The predetermined member is formed of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and the forward direction transmitting means and the backward direction transmitting means are different in structure.
When the driving force is transmitted from the positive direction transmission means,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first rotating body and the second rotating body have different rotational states when the driving force is transmitted from the reverse direction transmitting unit.   The at least part of the transmission means is formed so as to protrude inward from at least one axial end portion of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. Gaming machine.

Images